CN102014232A - Light-emitting device, print head and image forming device - Google Patents
Light-emitting device, print head and image forming device Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- CN102014232A CN102014232A CN2010101125434A CN201010112543A CN102014232A CN 102014232 A CN102014232 A CN 102014232A CN 2010101125434 A CN2010101125434 A CN 2010101125434A CN 201010112543 A CN201010112543 A CN 201010112543A CN 102014232 A CN102014232 A CN 102014232A
- Authority
- CN
- China
- Prior art keywords
- light
- memory
- state
- thyristor
- emitting
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 340
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 claims description 66
- 230000007274 generation of a signal involved in cell-cell signaling Effects 0.000 claims description 27
- 239000000758 substrate Substances 0.000 claims description 20
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 19
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 claims description 12
- 230000008030 elimination Effects 0.000 claims description 5
- 238000003379 elimination reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 5
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 28
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 28
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 28
- 230000003071 parasitic effect Effects 0.000 description 24
- 239000004065 semiconductor Substances 0.000 description 24
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 23
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 20
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 description 8
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910001218 Gallium arsenide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 3
- 239000002131 composite material Substances 0.000 description 3
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 3
- 230000009849 deactivation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000005684 electric field Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 108091008695 photoreceptors Proteins 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 229910008812 WSi Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052782 aluminium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000003491 array Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005468 ion implantation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052750 molybdenum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000008707 rearrangement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000004904 shortening Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000003068 static effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 229910052719 titanium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B41—PRINTING; LINING MACHINES; TYPEWRITERS; STAMPS
- B41J—TYPEWRITERS; SELECTIVE PRINTING MECHANISMS, i.e. MECHANISMS PRINTING OTHERWISE THAN FROM A FORME; CORRECTION OF TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS
- B41J2/00—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed
- B41J2/435—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by selective application of radiation to a printing material or impression-transfer material
- B41J2/447—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by selective application of radiation to a printing material or impression-transfer material using arrays of radiation sources
- B41J2/45—Typewriters or selective printing mechanisms characterised by the printing or marking process for which they are designed characterised by selective application of radiation to a printing material or impression-transfer material using arrays of radiation sources using light-emitting diode [LED] or laser arrays
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G15/00—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern
- G03G15/22—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern involving the combination of more than one step according to groups G03G13/02 - G03G13/20
- G03G15/32—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern involving the combination of more than one step according to groups G03G13/02 - G03G13/20 in which the charge pattern is formed dotwise, e.g. by a thermal head
- G03G15/326—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern involving the combination of more than one step according to groups G03G13/02 - G03G13/20 in which the charge pattern is formed dotwise, e.g. by a thermal head by application of light, e.g. using a LED array
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03G—ELECTROGRAPHY; ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY; MAGNETOGRAPHY
- G03G15/00—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern
- G03G15/04—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern for exposing, i.e. imagewise exposure by optically projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material
- G03G15/043—Apparatus for electrographic processes using a charge pattern for exposing, i.e. imagewise exposure by optically projecting the original image on a photoconductive recording material with means for controlling illumination or exposure
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Toxicology (AREA)
- Printers Or Recording Devices Using Electromagnetic And Radiation Means (AREA)
- Facsimile Heads (AREA)
- Led Devices (AREA)
Abstract
Description
技术领域technical field
本发明涉及发光装置、自扫描发光元件阵列的驱动方法、打印头以及图像形成设备。 The invention relates to a light-emitting device, a driving method of a self-scanning light-emitting element array, a printing head, and an image forming device. the
背景技术Background technique
在电子照相图像形成设备(诸如打印机、复印机或传真机)中,以如下方式在记录纸张上形成图像。首先,通过使得光学记录单元发光从而把图像信息转移到感光体上来在均匀充电的感光体上形成静电潜像。随后,通过采用调色剂显影使得静电潜像可见。最后,把调色剂图像转印并定影到记录纸张上。除了通过使用激光束在第一扫描方向上进行激光扫描执行曝光的光学扫描记录单元之外,近些年已采用使用下面的LED打印头(LPH)的记录装置作为这种光学记录单元以适应减小设备尺寸的需要。这种LPH包括在第一扫描方向上排列的大量发光二极管(LED),这些发光二极管作为发光元件。 In an electrophotographic image forming apparatus such as a printer, copier or facsimile, an image is formed on recording paper in the following manner. First, an electrostatic latent image is formed on a uniformly charged photoreceptor by causing an optical recording unit to emit light to transfer image information to the photoreceptor. Subsequently, the electrostatic latent image is made visible by development with toner. Finally, the toner image is transferred and fixed onto the recording paper. In addition to an optical scanning recording unit that performs exposure by performing laser scanning in the first scanning direction using a laser beam, a recording device using an LED print head (LPH) below has been adopted as such an optical recording unit in recent years to adapt to light-reduction. The need for small device sizes. This LPH includes a large number of light emitting diodes (LEDs) arrayed in the first scanning direction as light emitting elements. the
日本专利申请公开No.2004-181741描述了一种自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED:自扫描发光装置)芯片,其中移位部分和发光部分彼此分离,并且该芯片具有二极管耦合。在这种结构的SLED芯片中,移位部分中的晶闸管并不具有与其相连的对应发光晶闸管,以便实现多重发光并且中断进行中的数据写入。 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-181741 describes a self-scanning light-emitting element array (SLED: self-scanning light-emitting device) chip in which a displacement portion and a light-emitting portion are separated from each other, and the chip has diode coupling. In the SLED chip of this structure, the thyristors in the shifting part do not have corresponding light-emitting thyristors connected thereto, so as to realize multiple light emission and interrupt data writing in progress. the
在使用具有SLED的LPH的记录装置中,使用实现多重发光的SLED芯片造成功耗增加。 In a recording apparatus using an LPH with SLEDs, use of an SLED chip that realizes multiple light emission causes an increase in power consumption. the
本发明的目的在于提供一种抑制功耗增加的使用实现多重发光的自扫描发光元件阵列的发光装置、自扫描发光元件阵列的驱动方法、打印头以及图像形成设备。 An object of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting device using a self-scanning light-emitting element array that realizes multiple light emission, a driving method of the self-scanning light-emitting element array, a print head, and an image forming apparatus that suppress an increase in power consumption. the
发明内容Contents of the invention
根据本发明的第一方面,提供了一种发光装置,包括:自扫描发光元件阵列;以及点亮控制器,所述自扫描发光元件阵列包括:直线排列的多个发光元件;多个存储器元件,其设置为与各个发光元件相对应并且电连接到各个发光元件,每一个存储器元件都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,与被设定在关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个存储器元件使得各个发光元件容易被设定在导通状态;以及多个开关元件,其设置为与各个存储器元件相对应并且电连接到各个存储器元件,每个开关元件都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,所述多个开关元件被设定成允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧,与关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个开关元件使得各个存储器元件容易被设定在导通状态;所述点亮控制器包括:转移信号生成单元,其把转移信号提供到所述多个开关元件,所述转移信号设定所述多个开关元件从而允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧;存储器信号生成单元,其把存储器信号提供到与所述多个发光元件被分成的多个组中的一组的多个发光元件相对应的多个存储器元件,在与形成所述组的发光元件相对应的开关元件被设定在导通状态的情况下,如果想要点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件临时从关断状态变成导通状态,并且如果不想点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件保持在关断状态,并且随后使得已经被临时变成导通状态的存储器元件再次临时设定在导通状态;以及点亮信号生成单元,其针对每一组把点亮信号提供到所述多个发光元件,在使得与想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态之后,所述点亮信号使得所述想要点亮的发光元件设定在导通状态。 According to the first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light-emitting device, comprising: a self-scanning light-emitting element array; and a lighting controller, the self-scanning light-emitting element array comprising: a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in a straight line; a plurality of memory elements , which is set to correspond to each light-emitting element and electrically connected to each light-emitting element, each memory element is set in any one of the on-state and the off-state, and the case of being set in the off-state In contrast, the plurality of memory elements make it easy for each light emitting element to be set in an on state when being set in an on state; and a plurality of switching elements provided corresponding to the respective memory elements and Electrically connected to the respective memory elements, each switching element is set in any one of an ON state and an OFF state, and the plurality of switching elements are set to allow sequential shifting of the ON state from one end side to the other. On one end side, the plurality of switching elements make it easy for each memory element to be set in the on state when being set in the on state compared to the case in the off state; the lighting controller includes : a transfer signal generating unit that provides a transfer signal to the plurality of switching elements, the transfer signal setting the plurality of switching elements thereby allowing a conduction state to sequentially move from one end side to the other end side; a memory signal generating unit which supplies a memory signal to a plurality of memory elements corresponding to a plurality of light emitting elements of one of a plurality of groups into which the plurality of light emitting elements are divided, at switches corresponding to the light emitting elements forming the group When an element is set in a conductive state, if it is desired to light up a light-emitting element corresponding to the switching element, the memory signal causes the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the conductive state to temporarily From the off state to the on state, and if the light emitting element corresponding to the switching element is not intended to be lit, the memory signal causes the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the on state to remain in the off state. an off state, and then temporarily set the memory element that has been temporarily turned on into the on state again in the on state; and a lighting signal generating unit that supplies a lighting signal to the plurality of light emitting elements for each group The lighting signal causes the light emitting element to be turned on to be set in an on state after the memory element corresponding to the light emitting element to be turned on is set in an on state. the
根据本发明的第二方面,在发光装置的第一方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列还包括多个消除元件,所述多个消除元件设定为与各个存储器元件相对应并且电连接到各个存储器元件,并且所述点亮控制器还包括消除信号生成单元,所述消除信号生成单元把消除信号提供 到所述多个消除元件,在所述组中想要点亮的发光元件被设定在导通状态之后,所述消除信号防止与所述想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态。 According to the second aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect of the light-emitting device, the self-scanning light-emitting element array further includes a plurality of canceling elements set to correspond to the respective memory elements and electrically connected to the respective memory elements. memory element, and the lighting controller further includes an erasing signal generating unit that provides an erasing signal to the plurality of erasing elements, and the light-emitting element to be lit in the group is set After the conduction state, the deactivation signal prevents the memory element corresponding to the desired light-emitting element from being set in the conduction state. the
根据本发明的第三方面,在发光装置的第一和第二方面中任一方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列还包括多个保持元件,所述多个保持元件设置在各个发光元件和各个存储器元件之间从而与各个发光元件和各个存储器元件相对应,并且电连接到各个发光元件和各个存储器元件,与关断状态的情况相比,在各个存储器元件被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个保持元件使得各个发光元件容易点亮,并且所述点亮控制器还包括保持信号生成单元,所述保持信号生成单元把保持信号提供到所述多个保持元件,在使得与所述组中想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态之后,所述保持信号使得与处于导通状态的存储器元件相对应的保持元件设定在导通状态。 According to a third aspect of the present invention, in any one of the first and second aspects of the light-emitting device, the self-scanning light-emitting element array further includes a plurality of holding elements, and the plurality of holding elements are arranged on each light-emitting element and each Between the memory elements thereby corresponding to each light emitting element and each memory element, and electrically connected to each light emitting element and each memory element, compared with the case of an off state, in the case where each memory element is set in an on state Next, the plurality of holding elements make it easy to turn on each light-emitting element, and the lighting controller further includes a holding signal generation unit that supplies a holding signal to the plurality of holding elements so that After the memory element corresponding to the light-emitting element in the group to be turned on is set in the conductive state, the hold signal causes the hold element corresponding to the memory element in the conductive state to be set in the conductive state. the
根据本发明的第四方面,提供了一种发光装置,包括:自扫描发光元件阵列;以及点亮控制器,所述自扫描发光元件阵列包括:基板;多个发光晶闸管,其形成在所述基板上并且直线排列;多个存储器晶闸管,其形成在所述基板上并且设置为与各个发光晶闸管相对应,并且电连接到各个发光晶闸管,每一个存储器晶闸管都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,所述多个存储器晶闸管把所述多个发光晶闸管的各个阈值电压变成这样的值:与被设定在关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述值使得各个发光晶闸管容易被设定在导通状态;以及多个转移晶闸管,其形成在所述基板上并且设置为与各个存储器晶闸管相对应,并且电连接到各个存储器晶闸管,每一个转移晶闸管都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,所述多个转移晶闸管被设定成允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧,并且把所述多个存储器晶闸管的各个阈值电压变成这样的值:与关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述值使得各个存储器晶闸管容易被设定在导通状态;所述点亮控制器包括:转移信号生成单元,其把转移信号提供到所述多个转移晶闸管,所述转移信号设定所述多个转移晶闸管从而允许导通状态从一端 侧顺序移动到另一端侧;存储器信号生成单元,其把存储器信号提供到与所述多个发光晶闸管被分成的多个组中的一组的多个发光晶闸管相对应的多个存储器晶闸管,在与形成所述组的发光晶闸管相对应的转移晶闸管被设定在导通状态的情况下,如果想要点亮与所述转移晶闸管相对应的发光晶闸管,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的转移晶闸管相对应的存储器晶闸管临时从关断状态变成导通状态,并且如果不想点亮与所述转移晶闸管相对应的发光晶闸管,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的转移晶闸管相对应的存储器晶闸管保持在关断状态,并且随后使得已经被临时变成导通状态的存储器晶闸管再次临时设定在导通状态;以及点亮信号生成单元,其针对每一组把点亮信号提供到所述多个发光晶闸管,在使得与想要点亮的发光晶闸管相对应的存储器晶闸管设定在导通状态之后,所述点亮信号使得所述想要点亮的发光晶闸管设定在导通状态。 According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light-emitting device, including: a self-scanning light-emitting element array; and a lighting controller, the self-scanning light-emitting element array includes: a substrate; a plurality of light-emitting thyristors formed on the a plurality of memory thyristors formed on the substrate and arranged to correspond to the respective light-emitting thyristors and electrically connected to the respective light-emitting thyristors, and each memory thyristor is set in an on state and an off state. The plurality of memory thyristors change the respective threshold voltages of the plurality of light-emitting thyristors to values that, compared with the case of being set in the off state, become In the case of an on state, the value makes it easy for each light emitting thyristor to be set in an on state; and a plurality of transfer thyristors, which are formed on the substrate and arranged to correspond to each memory thyristor, and are electrically connected to each memory thyristors each of which is set in any one of an ON state and an OFF state, the plurality of transfer thyristors being set to allow the ON state to sequentially shift from one end side to the other end side, and changing the respective threshold voltages of the plurality of memory thyristors to values that allow the respective memory thyristors to be easily set at a conduction state; the lighting controller includes: a transfer signal generating unit that provides a transfer signal to the plurality of transfer thyristors, the transfer signal sets the plurality of transfer thyristors to allow the conduction state from one end side sequentially moving to the other end side; a memory signal generation unit that supplies a memory signal to a plurality of memory thyristors corresponding to a plurality of light emitting thyristors of one of a plurality of groups into which the plurality of light emitting thyristors are divided, at the same time as In case the transfer thyristors corresponding to the light emitting thyristors forming the group are set in a conduction state, if it is desired to turn on the light emitting thyristors corresponding to the transfer thyristors, the memory signal causes The memory thyristor corresponding to the transfer thyristor of the on state is temporarily changed from the off state to the on state, and if the light-emitting thyristor corresponding to the transfer thyristor is not to be lighted, the memory signal makes the same as set in the on state The memory thyristor corresponding to the transfer thyristor is kept in an off state, and then the memory thyristor that has been temporarily turned into an on state is temporarily set in an on state again; A lighting signal is supplied to the plurality of light-emitting thyristors, the lighting signal causes the light-emitting thyristor to be turned on to be turned on after setting a memory thyristor corresponding to the light-emitting thyristor to be turned on set in the on state. the
根据本发明的第五方面,在发光装置的第四方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列还包括多个消除二极管,所述多个消除二极管设置为与各个存储器晶闸管相对应并且电连接到各个存储器晶闸管,并且所述点亮控制器还包括消除信号生成单元,所述消除信号生成单元把消除信号提供到所述多个消除二极管,在所述组中想要点亮的发光晶闸管被设定在导通状态之后,所述消除信号防止与所述想要点亮的发光晶闸管相对应的存储器晶闸管设定在导通状态。 According to a fifth aspect of the present invention, in the fourth aspect of the light-emitting device, the self-scanning light-emitting element array further includes a plurality of cancellation diodes, and the plurality of cancellation diodes are arranged to correspond to the respective memory thyristors and electrically connected to the respective memory thyristors. thyristors, and the lighting controller further includes a cancellation signal generation unit that supplies cancellation signals to the plurality of cancellation diodes, and the light-emitting thyristors to be turned on in the group are set at After the conduction state, the deactivation signal prevents the memory thyristor corresponding to the light emitting thyristor to be turned on from being set in the conduction state. the
根据本发明的第六方面,在发光装置的第五方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列的消除二极管是肖特基二极管。 According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the fifth aspect of the light-emitting device, the canceling diodes of the self-scanning light-emitting element array are Schottky diodes. the
根据本发明的第七方面,在发光装置的第四到第六方面中的任一方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列还包括多个保持晶闸管,所述多个保持晶闸管形成在所述基板上,并且设置在各个发光晶闸管和各个存储器晶闸管之间从而与各个发光晶闸管和各个存储器晶闸管相对应,并且电连接到各个发光晶闸管和各个存储器晶闸管,所述多个保持晶闸管把所述多个发光晶闸管的各个阈值电压变成这样的值:与关断状态的情况相比,在所述多个存储器晶闸管被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述值使得各个发光晶闸管容易被设定在导通状态,并且所述点 亮控制器还包括保持信号生成单元,所述保持信号生成单元把保持信号提供到所述多个保持晶闸管,在使得与所述组中想要点亮的发光晶闸管相对应的存储器晶闸管设定在导通状态之后,所述保持信号使得与处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管相对应的保持晶闸管设定在导通状态。 According to a seventh aspect of the present invention, in any one of the fourth to sixth aspects of the light-emitting device, the self-scanning light-emitting element array further includes a plurality of holding thyristors, and the plurality of holding thyristors are formed on the substrate , and disposed between each light-emitting thyristor and each memory thyristor so as to correspond to each light-emitting thyristor and each memory thyristor, and electrically connected to each light-emitting thyristor and each memory thyristor, the plurality of holding thyristors connects the plurality of light-emitting thyristors The respective threshold voltages of each of the light-emitting thyristors become values such that the respective light-emitting thyristors are easily set in the on-state when the plurality of memory thyristors are set in the on-state compared to the off-state. the on state, and the lighting controller further includes a holding signal generating unit that provides a holding signal to the plurality of holding thyristors so as to be in phase with the light-emitting thyristor to be turned on in the group. After the corresponding memory thyristor is set in the conducting state, the holding signal causes the holding thyristor corresponding to the memory thyristor in the conducting state to be set in the conducting state. the
根据本发明的第八方面,提供了一种自扫描发光元件阵列的驱动方法,所述自扫描发光元件阵列包括:直线排列的多个发光元件;多个存储器元件,其设置为与各个发光元件相对应并且电连接到各个发光元件,每一个存储器元件都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,与设定在关断状态的情况相比,在设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个存储器元件使得各个发光元件容易设定在导通状态;以及多个开关元件,其设置为与各个存储器元件相对应并且电连接到各个存储器元件,每一个开关元件都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,所述多个开关元件被设定成允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧,与关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个开关元件使得各个存储器元件容易被设定在导通状态,所述驱动方法包括:把转移信号提供到所述多个开关元件,使得所述多个开关元件的导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧;把存储器信号提供到与所述多个发光元件被分成的多个组中的一组的多个发光元件相对应的多个存储器元件,在与形成所述组的发光元件相对应的开关元件被设定在导通状态的情况下,如果想要点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件临时从关断状态变成导通状态,并且如果不想点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件保持在关断状态,并且随后使得已经被临时变成导通状态的存储器元件再次临时设定在导通状态;以及针对每一组把点亮信号提供到所述多个发光元件,在使得与想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态之后,所述点亮信号使得所述想要点亮的发光元件设定在导通状态。 According to an eighth aspect of the present invention, there is provided a driving method of a self-scanning light-emitting element array, the self-scanning light-emitting element array comprising: a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in a straight line; Corresponding to and electrically connected to each light-emitting element, each memory element is set in any one of the on state and the off state, compared with the case of being set in the off state, the In the case of a state, the plurality of memory elements makes it easy to set each light emitting element in a conduction state; and a plurality of switch elements are arranged to correspond to each memory element and are electrically connected to each memory element, each switch element are set in any one of the on-state and the off-state, the plurality of switching elements are set to allow the on-state to move sequentially from one end side to the other end side, compared to the case of the off-state , the plurality of switching elements make it easy for each memory element to be set in a conductive state when being set in a conductive state, the driving method includes: supplying a transfer signal to the plurality of switching elements, causing the conduction states of the plurality of switching elements to sequentially shift from one end side to the other end side; supplying a memory signal to a plurality of light emitting elements corresponding to one of a plurality of groups into which the plurality of light emitting elements are divided a plurality of memory elements, and in a case where the switching elements corresponding to the light emitting elements forming the group are set in a conductive state, if it is desired to turn on the light emitting elements corresponding to the switching elements, the A memory signal temporarily changes a memory element corresponding to a switching element set in an on state from an off state to an on state, and if it is not desired to light up a light emitting element corresponding to the switching element, the memory signal causing the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the on state to be kept in the off state, and then causing the memory element which has been temporarily turned into the on state to be temporarily set in the on state again; and for each group supplying a lighting signal to the plurality of light emitting elements, the lighting signal causes the light emitting element to be turned on to emit light after setting a memory element corresponding to the light emitting element to be turned on in a conductive state element is set in the conduction state. the
根据本发明的第九方面,在自扫描发光元件阵列的驱动方法的第八方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列还包括多个消除元件,所述多个消除元件设置为与各个存储器元件相对应并且电连接到各个存储器元件,并且所述驱动方法还包括:把消除信号提供到所述多个消除元件,在所述组中想要点亮的发光元件被设定在导通状态之后,所述消除信号防止与所述想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态。 According to the ninth aspect of the present invention, in the eighth aspect of the driving method of the self-scanning light-emitting element array, the self-scanning light-emitting element array further includes a plurality of elimination elements, and the plurality of elimination elements are arranged to correspond to the respective memory elements and electrically connected to each memory element, and the driving method further includes: providing an erasing signal to the plurality of erasing elements, after the light-emitting element to be lighted in the group is set in a conduction state, the The cancel signal prevents the memory element corresponding to the desired light-emitting element from being set in a conductive state. the
根据本发明的第十方面,在自扫描发光元件阵列的驱动方法的第八到第十方面中的任一方面,所述自扫描发光元件阵列还包括多个保持元件,所述多个保持元件设置在各个发光元件和各个存储器元件之间从而与各个发光元件和各个存储器元件相对应,并且电连接到各个发光元件和各个存储器元件,与关断状态的情况相比,在各个存储器元件被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个保持元件使得各个发光元件容易点亮,并且所述驱动方法还包括:把保持信号提供到所述多个保持元件,在使得与所述组中想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态之后,所述保持信号使得与处于导通状态的存储器元件相对应的保持元件设定在导通状态。 According to the tenth aspect of the present invention, in any one of the eighth to tenth aspects of the driving method of the self-scanning light-emitting element array, the self-scanning light-emitting element array further includes a plurality of holding elements, and the plurality of holding elements Provided between each light emitting element and each memory element so as to correspond to each light emitting element and each memory element, and electrically connected to each light emitting element and each memory element, compared with the case of an off state, when each memory element is set The plurality of holding elements make it easy to light up each light-emitting element under the condition of being in the conduction state, and the driving method further includes: supplying a holding signal to the plurality of holding elements so as to be compatible with the group After the memory element corresponding to the light-emitting element to be turned on is set in the ON state, the hold signal causes the hold element corresponding to the memory element in the ON state to be set in the ON state. the
根据本发明的第十一方面,提供了一种打印头,包括:曝光单元;以及光学单元,所述曝光单元对图像载体进行曝光并且包括:自扫描发光元件阵列;以及点亮控制器,所述自扫描发光元件阵列包括:直线排列的多个发光元件;多个存储器元件,其设置为与各个发光元件相对应并且电连接到各个发光元件,每一个存储器元都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,与被设定在关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个存储器元件使得各个发光元件容易被设定在导通状态;以及多个开关元件,其设置为与各个存储器元件相对应并且电连接到各个存储器元件,每一个开关元件都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,所述多个开关元件被设定成允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧,与关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个开关元件使得各个存储器元件容易被设定在导通状态;所述点亮控制器包括:转移信号 生成单元,其把转移信号提供到所述多个开关元件,所述转移信号设定所述多个开关元件从而允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧;存储器信号生成单元,其把存储器信号提供到与所述多个发光元件被分成的多个组中的一组的多个发光元件相对应的多个存储器元件,在与形成所述组的发光元件相对应的开关元件被设定在导通状态的情况下,如果想要点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件临时从关断状态变成导通状态,并且如果不想点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件保持在关断状态,并且随后使得已经被临时变成导通状态的存储器元件再次临时设定在导通状态;以及点亮信号生成单元,其针对每一组把点亮信号提供到所述多个发光元件,在使得与想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态之后,所述点亮信号使得想要点亮的发光元件设定在导通状态;所述光学单元使得从所述曝光单元发出的光会聚到所述图像载体上。 According to an eleventh aspect of the present invention, there is provided a print head, including: an exposure unit; and an optical unit, which exposes an image carrier and includes: a self-scanning light-emitting element array; and a lighting controller, the The self-scanning light-emitting element array includes: a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in a straight line; a plurality of memory elements, which are arranged to correspond to each light-emitting element and electrically connected to each light-emitting element, and each memory element is set in a conduction state In either state of the off state, the plurality of memory elements make it easy for each light emitting element to be set in the case of being set in the on state as compared with the case of being set in the off state. a conduction state; and a plurality of switching elements, which are arranged to correspond to the respective memory elements and electrically connected to the respective memory elements, each switching element being set in any one of the conduction state and the off state, so The plurality of switching elements are set to allow the conduction state to sequentially move from one end side to the other end side, and in the case of being set in the conduction state, the plurality of switching elements making it easy for each memory element to be set in a conduction state; the lighting controller includes: a transfer signal generation unit that provides a transfer signal to the plurality of switch elements, the transfer signal sets the plurality of switches an element thereby allowing the conduction state to sequentially move from one end side to the other end side; a memory signal generating unit which supplies a memory signal to a plurality of light emitting elements corresponding to one of a plurality of groups into which the plurality of light emitting elements are divided; For the corresponding plurality of memory elements, in the case where the switching elements corresponding to the light emitting elements forming the group are set in a conductive state, if it is desired to turn on the light emitting elements corresponding to the switching elements, the The memory signal causes the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the on state to temporarily change from the off state to the on state, and if the light emitting element corresponding to the switching element is not to be turned on, the memory a signal to keep the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the on state in the off state, and then temporarily set the memory element which has been temporarily turned into the on state in the on state again; and the light-on signal a generation unit that supplies a lighting signal to the plurality of light emitting elements for each group, the lighting signal causing A light-emitting element to be lit is set in a conduction state; the optical unit causes light emitted from the exposure unit to converge on the image carrier. the
根据本发明的第十二方面,提供了一种图像形成设备,包括:充电单元,其对图像载体进行充电;曝光单元;光学单元;显影单元;以及转印单元,所述曝光单元对所述图像载体进行曝光并且包括自扫描发光元件阵列以及点亮控制器,所述自扫描发光元件阵列包括:直线排列的多个发光元件;多个存储器元件,其设置为与各个发光元件相对应并且电连接到各个发光元件,每一个存储器元都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,与被设定在关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个存储器元件使得各个发光元件容易被设定在导通状态;以及多个开关元件,其设置为与各个存储器元件相对应并且电连接到各个存储器元件,每一个开关元件都被设定在导通状态和关断状态中的任一个状态,所述多个开关元件被设定成允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧,与关断状态的情况相比,在被设定在导通状态的情况下,所述多个开关元件使得各个存储器元件容易被设定在导通状态;所述点亮控制器包括:转移信号生成单元,其把转移信号提供到所述多个开关元件,所述转移信号设定所 述多个开关元件从而允许导通状态从一端侧顺序移动到另一端侧;存储器信号生成单元,其把存储器信号提供到与所述多个发光元件被分成的多个组中的一组的多个发光元件相对应的多个存储器元件,在与形成所述组的发光元件相对应的开关元件被设定在导通状态的情况下,如果想要点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件临时从关断状态变成导通状态,并且如果不想点亮与所述开关元件相对应的发光元件,则所述存储器信号使得与设定在导通状态的开关元件相对应的存储器元件保持在关断状态,并且随后使得已经被临时变成导通状态的存储器元件再次临时设定在导通状态;以及点亮信号生成单元,其针对每一组把点亮信号提供到所述多个发光元件,在使得与想要点亮的发光元件相对应的存储器元件设定在导通状态之后,所述点亮信号使得想要点亮的发光元件设定在导通状态;所述光学单元使得从所述曝光单元发出的光会聚到所述图像载体上;所述显影单元对形成在所述图像载体上的静电潜像进行显影;所述转印单元将所述图像载体上显影出的图像转印到被转印体上。 According to a twelfth aspect of the present invention, there is provided an image forming apparatus including: a charging unit that charges an image carrier; an exposure unit; an optical unit; a developing unit; The image carrier is exposed and includes a self-scanning light-emitting element array including: a plurality of light-emitting elements arranged in a straight line; a plurality of memory elements arranged to correspond to the respective light-emitting elements and electrically powered; Connected to each light-emitting element, each memory cell is set in any one of the on state and the off state, compared with the case of being set in the off state, in the case of being set in the on state In this case, the plurality of memory elements makes it easy for each light emitting element to be set in a conduction state; and a plurality of switch elements, which are arranged to correspond to and electrically connected to each memory element, each switch element being set in any one of the on-state and the off-state, the plurality of switching elements are set to allow the on-state to move sequentially from one end side to the other end side, compared to the case of the off-state, In the case of being set in a conduction state, the plurality of switching elements make it easy for each memory element to be set in a conduction state; the lighting controller includes: a transfer signal generating unit that provides a transfer signal to the plurality of switching elements, the transfer signal sets the plurality of switching elements so as to allow the conduction state to move sequentially from one end side to the other end side; a memory signal generating unit which supplies a memory signal to the plurality of The plurality of memory elements corresponding to the plurality of light emitting elements of one of the plurality of groups into which the light emitting elements are divided, in a case where the switching elements corresponding to the light emitting elements forming the group are set in a conductive state, If it is desired to turn on the light-emitting element corresponding to the switching element, the memory signal causes the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the on state to temporarily change from the off state to the on state, and if not wanting to light up the light-emitting element corresponding to the switching element, the memory signal causes the memory element corresponding to the switching element set in the on-state to remain in the off-state, and then causes the memory element that has been temporarily turned on to be turned on. The memory element in the on state is temporarily set in the on state again; and a lighting signal generating unit which supplies a lighting signal to the plurality of light emitting elements for each group so that After the corresponding memory element is set in the conduction state, the light-on signal causes the light-emitting element to be lighted to be set in the conduction state; the optical unit causes the light emitted from the exposure unit to converge to the image on the carrier; the developing unit develops the electrostatic latent image formed on the image carrier; the transfer unit transfers the image developed on the image carrier to the transferred body. the
根据本发明的第一方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以使用实现多重发光的自扫描发光元件阵列抑制发光装置的功耗增加。 According to the first aspect of the present invention, an increase in power consumption of a light emitting device can be suppressed using a self-scanning light emitting element array realizing multiple light emission, compared to a case where the present structure is not employed. the
根据本发明的第二方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以增大发光占空比(发光效率)。 According to the second aspect of the present invention, it is possible to increase the light emission duty (light emission efficiency) compared to the case where the present structure is not employed. the
根据本发明的第三方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以进一步增大发光占空比。 According to the third aspect of the present invention, the duty ratio of light emission can be further increased compared to the case where the present structure is not adopted. the
根据本发明的第四方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以使用实现多重发光的自扫描发光元件阵列抑制发光装置的功耗增加。 According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, an increase in power consumption of a light emitting device can be suppressed using a self-scanning light emitting element array realizing multiple light emission, compared to a case where the present structure is not employed. the
根据本发明的第五方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以增大发光占空比。 According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, compared with the case where the present structure is not employed, the duty ratio of light emission can be increased. the
根据本发明的第六方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以抑制寄生晶闸管运行。 According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, parasitic thyristor operation can be suppressed compared to the case where the present structure is not employed. the
根据本发明的第七方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以进一步增大发光占空比。 According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, it is possible to further increase the light emission duty ratio compared to the case where the present structure is not adopted. the
根据本发明的第八方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以使用实现多重发光的自扫描发光元件阵列抑制发光装置的功耗增加。 According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, an increase in power consumption of the light emitting device can be suppressed using the self-scanning light emitting element array realizing multiple light emission, compared to the case where the present structure is not employed. the
根据本发明的第九方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以增大发光占空比。 According to the ninth aspect of the present invention, it is possible to increase the light emission duty ratio compared to the case where the present structure is not adopted. the
根据本发明的第十方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以进一步增大发光占空比。 According to the tenth aspect of the present invention, the duty ratio of light emission can be further increased compared to the case where the present structure is not adopted. the
根据本发明的第十一方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以抑制功耗的增加,同时减小打印头的尺寸。 According to the eleventh aspect of the present invention, an increase in power consumption can be suppressed while reducing the size of the print head as compared with the case where the present structure is not employed. the
根据本发明的第十二方面,与没有采用本结构的情况相比,可以抑制功耗的增加,同时加速图像形成。 According to the twelfth aspect of the present invention, image formation can be accelerated while suppressing an increase in power consumption as compared with the case where the present structure is not employed. the
附图说明Description of drawings
根据以下附图具体描述了本发明的(多个)示例性实施例,其中: Exemplary embodiment(s) of the invention are described in detail with reference to the following drawings, in which:
图1示出应用了第一示例性实施例的图像形成设备的整体结构的实例; FIG. 1 shows an example of the overall structure of an image forming apparatus to which the first exemplary embodiment is applied;
图2是示出应用了第一示例性实施例的打印头的结构的示意图; FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a print head to which the first exemplary embodiment is applied;
图3是发光装置的俯视图; Figure 3 is a top view of the light emitting device;
图4是示出了第一示例性实施例中的发光装置中的信号生成电路的结构以及信号生成电路和发光芯片的布线结构的示意图; 4 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the signal generation circuit in the light emitting device in the first exemplary embodiment and the wiring structure of the signal generation circuit and the light emitting chip;
图5是说明第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片的布线结构的示意图; 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating a wiring structure of a light emitting chip in the first exemplary embodiment;
图6是说明发光芯片的操作概要的示意图; 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the operation of a light-emitting chip;
图7是说明第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片操作的时序图; 7 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light emitting chip in the first exemplary embodiment;
图8是说明没有应用第一示例性实施例情况下的发光芯片操作的时序图; 8 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of a light-emitting chip without applying the first exemplary embodiment;
图9是示出了存储器晶闸管的阈值电压与存储器晶闸管关断之后栅极端子电势的变化的一个实例的曲线图; FIG. 9 is a graph showing an example of a threshold voltage of a memory thyristor and a change in a gate terminal potential after the memory thyristor is turned off;
图10是说明第二示例性实施例中的发光芯片操作的时序图; FIG. 10 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light emitting chip in the second exemplary embodiment;
图11是示出了第三示例性实施例中的发光装置中的信号生成电 路的结构以及信号生成电路与每一个发光芯片之间的布线结构的示意图; 11 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a signal generating circuit in a light emitting device in a third exemplary embodiment and a wiring structure between the signal generating circuit and each light emitting chip;
图12是说明第三示例性实施例中的发光芯片的电路结构的示意图; 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating a circuit structure of a light emitting chip in a third exemplary embodiment;
图13是说明第三示例性实施例中的发光芯片操作的时序图; 13 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light emitting chip in the third exemplary embodiment;
图14是示出了第四示例性实施例中的发光装置中的信号生成电路的结构以及信号生成电路与每一个发光芯片之间的布线结构的示意图; 14 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the signal generation circuit in the light emitting device in the fourth exemplary embodiment and the wiring structure between the signal generation circuit and each light emitting chip;
图15是说明第四示例性实施例中的发光芯片的电路结构的示意图; 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating a circuit structure of a light emitting chip in a fourth exemplary embodiment;
图16是说明第四示例性实施例中的发光芯片操作的时序图; 16 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light emitting chip in the fourth exemplary embodiment;
图17是示出了第五示例性实施例中的发光装置中的信号生成电路的结构以及信号生成电路与每一个发光芯片中之间的布线结构的示意图; 17 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the signal generating circuit in the light emitting device in the fifth exemplary embodiment and the wiring structure between the signal generating circuit and each light emitting chip;
图18是说明第五示例性实施例中的发光芯片的电路结构的示意图;以及 18 is a schematic diagram illustrating a circuit structure of a light emitting chip in a fifth exemplary embodiment; and
图19是说明第五示例性实施例中的发光芯片操作的时序图。 Fig. 19 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light emitting chip in the fifth exemplary embodiment. the
具体实施方式Detailed ways
(图像形成设备) (image forming equipment)
下文将参考附图详细描述本发明的示例性实施例。 Exemplary embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. the
<第一示例性实施例> <First Exemplary Embodiment>
图1示出应用了第一示例性实施例的图像形成设备1的整体结构的实例。图1中所示的图像形成设备1通常被称为串联型图像形成设备。图像形成设备1包括图像形成处理单元10、图像输出控制器30和图像处理器40。图像形成处理单元10根据不同颜色的图像数据集形成图像。图像输出控制器30控制图像形成处理单元10。图像处理器40连接到诸如个人计算机(PC)2和图像读取设备3之类的装置,对从上述装置接收到的图像数据执行预定的图像处理。 FIG. 1 shows an example of the overall structure of an
图像形成处理单元10包括图像形成单元11。图像形成单元11由等间隔并行布置的多个引擎组成。具体地说,图像形成单元11由四个图像形成单元11Y、11M、11C和11K组成。图像形成单元11Y、11M、11C和11K中的每一个都包括感光鼓12、充电装置13、打印头14和显影装置15。在作为图像载体实例的感光鼓12上形成静电潜像,并且感光鼓12保持调色剂图像。作为充电单元实例的充电装置13以预定电势对感光鼓12的表面均匀充电。打印头14对通过充电装置13充电的感光鼓12进行曝光。作为显影单元实例的显影装置15将由打印头14形成的静电潜像进行显影。这里,除了在显影装置15中容纳的调色剂的颜色不同之外,图像形成单元11Y、11M、11C和11K具有大致相同的结构。图像形成单元11Y、11M、11C和11K分别形成黄色(Y)、晶红色(M)、青色(或称蓝绿色)(C)和黑色(K)调色剂图像。 The image forming
另外,图像形成处理单元10还包括纸张传送带21、驱动辊22、转印辊23和定影装置24。纸张传送带21传送作为被转印体的记录纸张,从而通过多层转印把分别形成在图像形成单元11Y、11M、11C和11K的感光鼓12上的不同颜色的调色剂图像转印到记录纸张上。驱动辊22是驱动纸张传送带21的辊。作为转印单元实例的每个转印辊23把形成在对应感光鼓12上的调色剂图像转印到记录纸张上。定影装置24把调色剂图像定影在记录纸张上。 In addition, the image forming
在该图像形成设备1中,图像形成处理单元10根据从图像输出控制器30提供的各种控制信号执行图像形成操作。在图像输出控制器30的控制下,图像处理器40对从个人计算机(PC)2或图像读取设备3接收的图像数据进行图像处理,并且随后把得到的数据集提供到对应的图像形成单元11。随后,例如在黑色(K)图像形成单元11K中,感光鼓12在沿箭头A方向旋转的同时由充电装置13以预定电势进行充电,并且随后打印头14根据从图像处理器40提供的图像数据集进行发光来对感光鼓12进行曝光。通过这种操作,用于黑色(K)图像的静电潜像形成在感光鼓12上。其后,显影装置15把形成在感光鼓12上的静电潜像显影出来,并且因此黑色(K)调色剂图像形成 在感光鼓12上。类似地,分别在图像形成单元11Y、11M和11C上形成黄色(Y)、晶红(M)和青色(C)调色剂图像。 In this
通过施加到转印辊23的转印电场,在各个图像形成单元11中形成在感光鼓12上的各个颜色的调色剂图像被顺序地静电转印到由于纸张传送带21的运动而提供的记录纸张。这里,纸张传送带21沿箭头B方向运动。通过这种操作,在记录纸张上形成了作为重叠颜色调色剂图像的合成调色剂图像。 By the transfer electric field applied to the
其后,其上静电转印了合成调色剂图像的记录纸张被发送到定影装置24。发送到定影装置24的记录纸张上的合成调色剂图像由定影装置24利用热和压力通过定影处理定影到记录纸张上,并且随后从图像形成设备1输出。 Thereafter, the recording paper on which the composite toner image is electrostatically transferred is sent to the fixing
(打印头) (Print Head)
图2是示出应用了第一示例性实施例的打印头14的结构的示意图。打印头14包括外壳61、发光部分63、电路板62和棒状透镜阵列64。发光部分63具有多个LED(在第一示例性实施例中是发光晶闸管)。在电路板62上安装了发光部分63、信号生成电路100(参见稍后描述的图3)等,信号生成电路100作为驱动发光部分63的点亮控制器的实例。作为光学单元实例的棒状透镜阵列64把发光部分63所发出的光会聚到感光鼓12的表面上。这里,发光部分63、信号生成电路100和其上安装了这些元件的电路板62将被称为发光装置65,该发光装置65作为曝光单元的实例。 FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the
外壳61例如由金属制成,并且支撑电路板62和棒状透镜阵列64。外壳61被设置成使得发光部分63的发光点位于棒状透镜阵列64的焦平面上。此外,棒状透镜阵列64沿感光鼓12的轴向(第一扫描方向)布置。 The
(发光装置) (light emitting device)
图3是发光装置65的俯视图。 FIG. 3 is a plan view of the
如图3所示,发光装置65的发光部分63由在电路板62上沿第 一扫描方向排列成两行的60个发光芯片C1到C60组成。这里,60个发光芯片C1到C60以锯齿形图案排列,其中发光芯片C1到C60的每相邻的两个彼此面对。注意,如果不区分发光芯片C1到C60,则它们被描述为发光芯片C(C1到C60)或发光芯片C。对其它的术语也是如此。 As shown in FIG. 3, the
所有的发光芯片C(C1到C60)具有相同的结构。每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)具有由作为发光元件实例的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…组成的发光晶闸管阵列(发光元件阵列),这如稍后所述。发光晶闸管阵列沿发光芯片C的矩形的长边排列。发光晶闸管阵列排列成靠近长边之一并且使得发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…形成等间隔。这里,奇数编号的发光芯片C1、C3、C5…和偶数编号的发光芯片C2,C4,C6…排列成彼此面对。另外,发光芯片C1到C60排列成使得发光晶闸管在如虚线所示的发光芯片C的连接部分中也沿第一扫描方向等间隔排列。 All light emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ) have the same structure. Each light-emitting chip C ( C1 to C60 ) has a light-emitting thyristor array (light-emitting element array) composed of light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 . . . as examples of light-emitting elements, as will be described later. The light emitting thyristor array is arranged along the long side of the rectangle of the light emitting chip C. The light emitting thyristor array is arranged close to one of the long sides and such that the light emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, . . . are formed at equal intervals. Here, odd-numbered light-emitting chips C1, C3, C5... and even-numbered light-emitting chips C2, C4, C6... are arranged to face each other. In addition, the light-emitting chips C1 to C60 are arranged such that the light-emitting thyristors are also arranged at equal intervals in the first scanning direction in the connection portion of the light-emitting chip C as indicated by a dotted line. the
而且,如上所述,发光装置65包括驱动发光部分63的信号生成电路100。 Also, as described above, the
注意,如果不区分发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…,则它们被称为发光晶闸管L。 Note that the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 . . . are referred to as light-emitting thyristors L if they are not distinguished. the
图4是示出了发光装置65中的信号生成电路100的结构以及信号生成电路100和发光芯片C(C1到C60)的布线结构的示意图。注意,在图4中,由于描述布线结构,所以没有以锯齿形图案图示发光芯片C1到C60。 4 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the
经过图像处理的图像数据集以及各种控制信号从图像输出控制器30和图像处理器40(参见图1)输入到信号生成电路100,图中省略了其图示。随后,信号生成电路100根据图像数据集和各种控制信号对图像数据集执行重新排列并对发光强度等进行校正。 The image-processed image data set and various control signals are input to the
信号生成电路100包括点亮信号生成单元110,该点亮信号生成单元110把用于向发光晶闸管L提供用于发光的电力的点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。 The
信号生成电路100包括转移信号生成单元120,该转移信号生成 单元120根据各种控制信号把第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2发送到发光芯片C1到C60。此外,信号生成电路100包括存储器信号生成单元130,该存储器信号生成单元130根据图像数据集发送指定将要点亮的发光晶闸管L的存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)。 The
发光装置65的电路板62设置有电源线104。电源线104连接到发光芯片C(C1到C60)的Vsub端子(参见稍后描述的图5),并且提供基准电势Vsub(例如,0V)。另外,发光装置65的电路板62设置有另一电源线105。电源线105连接到发光芯片C(C1到C60)的Vga端子(参见稍后描述的图5),并且提供用于供电的电源电势Vga(例如,-3.3V)。 The
而且,电路板62设置有第一转移信号线106和第二转移信号线107。第一转移信号线106和第二转移信号线107把来自信号生成电路100的转移信号生成单元120的第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2分别发送到发光部分63。第一转移信号线106和第二转移信号线107分别并联连接到发光芯片C(C1到C60)的φ1端子和φ2端子(参见稍后描述的图5)。 Also, the
此外,电路板62设置有60个存储器信号线108(108_1到108_60)。存储器信号线108把来自信号生成电路100的存储器信号生成单元130的各个存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)发送到对应的发光芯片C(C1到C60)。存储器信号线108_1到108_60分别连接到发光芯片C1到C60的φm端子(参见稍后描述的图5)。即,存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)被单独地发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。 Furthermore, the
而且,电路板62还设置有30个点亮信号线109(109_1到109_30)。点亮信号线109把来自信号生成电路100的点亮信号生成单元110的各个点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)发送到对应的发光芯片C(C1到C60)。点亮信号线109(109_1到109_30)中的每一个都连接到作为一对的两个发光芯片C的两个φI端子(参见稍后描述的图5)。例如,点亮信号线109_1并联连接到发光芯片C1和C2的φI端子,并且点亮信号φI1共同提供到发光芯片C1和C2的φI端子。类似地,点亮信号线109_2并联连接到发光芯片C3和C4的 φI端子,并且点亮信号φI2共同提供到发光芯片C3和C4的φI端子。其它的点亮信号线也具有类似的结构。这样,点亮信号φI的数量(30)是发光芯片C的数量(60)的半。 Moreover, the
如上所述,在第一示例性实施例中,基准电势Vsub、电源电势Vga、第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2共同被发送到所有发光芯片C(C1到C60)。存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)被单独发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)中的每一个都被发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60)中的对应两个。 As described above, in the first exemplary embodiment, the reference potential Vsub, the power supply potential Vga, the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2 are commonly sent to all the light emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ). The memory signals φm (φm1 to φm60) are individually sent to the light-emitting chips C (C1 to C60). Each of the lighting signals φI (φI1 to φI30 ) is sent to corresponding two of the light-emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ). the
通过这种配置,点亮信号线109(109_1到109_30)的数量被设定成小于发光芯片C(C1到C60)的数量。 With this configuration, the number of lighting signal lines 109 ( 109_1 to 109_30 ) is set to be smaller than the number of light-emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ). the
点亮信号线109要求具有低电阻从而把用于点亮(发光)的电流提供到发光晶闸管L。为此,如果点亮信号线109配置成宽布线,则电路板62的宽度变大,妨碍了打印头14的尺寸减小。另一方面,为了使得电路板62的宽度变窄,如果信号线被配置成具有多层,则这种配置妨碍了打印头14的成本降低。 The
在第一示例性实施例中,与分别为发光芯片C设置点亮信号线109的情况相比,减少了点亮信号线109的数量,并且由此可以减小打印头14的尺寸并且以低成本制造打印头14。 In the first exemplary embodiment, compared with the case where the
另一方面,在第一示例性实施例中,存储器信号线108设置成使得存储器信号线108的数量与发光芯片C的数量相等。如稍后所述,唯一必须的是,存储器信号线108提供保持存储器晶闸管M(参见稍后描述的图5)的导通(ON)状态的电流。保持存储器晶闸管M的导通状态的电流小于用于使发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)的电流,并且由此存储器信号线108的宽度被设定成不像点亮信号线109一样具有低电阻是可接受的。 On the other hand, in the first exemplary embodiment, the
换言之,减小点亮信号线109的数量可以实现减小打印头14的尺寸和低成本制造打印头14。 In other words, reducing the number of
(发光芯片) (light-emitting chip)
图5是说明作为自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED)芯片的发光芯片C (C1到C60)的布线结构的示意图。这里,发光芯片C1被描述为一个实例。然而,其它发光芯片C2到C60具有与发光芯片C1相同的结构。 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating a wiring structure of light emitting chips C (C1 to C60) which are self-scanning light emitting element array (SLED) chips. Here, the light-emitting chip C1 is described as an example. However, the other light emitting chips C2 to C60 have the same structure as the light emitting chip C1. the
发光芯片C1(C)包括由排成一行的作为开关元件实例的转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…组成的转移晶闸管阵列(开关元件阵列),由同样排成一行的作为存储器元件实例的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…组成的存储器晶闸管阵列(存储器元件阵列),以及由同样排成一行的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…组成的发光晶闸管阵列(发光元件阵列),这些阵列都被布置在基板80上。 The light-emitting chip C1 (C) includes a transfer thyristor array (switching element array) consisting of transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3, . . . , M2, M3...A memory thyristor array (memory element array), and a light-emitting thyristor array (light-emitting element array) composed of light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3... that are also arranged in a row, these arrays are arranged on the
这里,与发光晶闸管L相类似,如果不区分转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…,则它们被称为转移晶闸管T。类似地,如果不区分存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…,则它们被称为存储器晶闸管M。 Here, similar to the light emitting thyristor L, the transfer thyristors T1 , T2 , T3 . . . are called transfer thyristors T if they are not distinguished. Similarly, memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . . . are referred to as memory thyristors M if they are not distinguished. the
发光芯片C1(C)包括连接如下各个对的耦合二极管Dc1、Dc2、Dc3…,所述各个对是转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3中的每两个并且按照编号顺序形成。而且,发光芯片C1(C)包括连接二极管Dm1、Dm2、Dm3…。 The light-emitting chip C1(C) includes coupling diodes Dc1, Dc2, Dc3... connecting each pair of each two of the transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3 and formed in numerical order. Also, the light emitting chip C1(C) includes connection diodes Dm1, Dm2, Dm3.... the
此外,发光芯片C1(C)包括电源线电阻Rt1、Rt2、Rt3…,电源线电阻Rm1、Rm2、Rm3…,以及电阻Rn1、Rn2、Rn3…。 In addition, the light emitting chip C1(C) includes power line resistors Rt1, Rt2, Rt3..., power line resistors Rm1, Rm2, Rm3..., and resistors Rn1, Rn2, Rn3.... the
这里,与发光晶闸管L等类似,如果不分别地区分耦合二极管Dc1、Dc2、Dc3…,连接二极管Dm1、Dm2、Dm3…,电源线电阻Rt1、Rt2、Rt3…,电源线电阻Rm1、Rm2、Rm3…,以及电阻Rn1、Rn2、Rn3…,则它们被分别称为耦合二极管Dc,连接二极管Dm,电源线电阻Rt,电源线电阻Rm,以及电阻Rn。 Here, similar to the light-emitting thyristor L, etc., if the coupling diodes Dc1, Dc2, Dc3..., the connection diodes Dm1, Dm2, Dm3..., the power line resistances Rt1, Rt2, Rt3..., the power line resistances Rm1, Rm2, Rm3 are not distinguished separately ..., and resistors Rn1, Rn2, Rn3..., they are respectively called coupling diode Dc, connection diode Dm, power line resistance Rt, power line resistance Rm, and resistance Rn. the
在第一示例性实施例中,如果发光晶闸管阵列中的发光晶闸管L的数量被设定为128,则转移晶闸管T的数量以及存储器晶闸管M的数量也被设定为128。类似地,连接二极管Dm的数量、电源线电阻Rt和Rm各自的数量、电阻Rn的数量也为128。同时,耦合二极管Dc的数量为127,比转移晶闸管T的数量小1。 In the first exemplary embodiment, if the number of light-emitting thyristors L in the light-emitting thyristor array is set to 128, the number of transfer thyristors T and the number of memory thyristors M are also set to 128. Similarly, the number of connection diodes Dm, the respective numbers of power line resistors Rt and Rm, and the number of resistors Rn are also 128. Meanwhile, the number of coupling diodes Dc is 127, which is one less than the number of transfer thyristors T. the
注意,在图5中,仅示出了主要包括转移晶闸管T1到T8、存储器晶闸管M1到M8、以及发光晶闸管L1到L8的部分。在其它部分中,以与该部分相同的模式重复。 Note that in FIG. 5 , only a portion mainly including transfer thyristors T1 to T8 , memory thyristors M1 to M8 , and light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 is shown. In other sections, repeat in the same pattern as this section. the
转移晶闸管T的数量并非必须与发光晶闸管L的数量相等,并且可以大于发光晶闸管L的数量。 The number of transfer thyristors T is not necessarily equal to the number of light emitting thyristors L, and may be greater than the number of light emitting thyristors L. the
而且,发光芯片C1(C)包括一个启动二极管Ds。为了防止过量电流流入到第一转移信号线72和第二转移信号线73中,发光芯片C1(C)包括限流电阻R1和R2。 Also, the light emitting chip C1(C) includes a start diode Ds. In order to prevent excessive current from flowing into the first
注意,转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…在图5中按照编号顺序排列。这里,转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…从图5的左侧开始排列,诸如T1、T2、T3…。类似地,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…和发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…也从图5的左侧按照编号顺序排列。另外,耦合二极管Dc 1、Dc2、Dc3…,连接二极管Dm1、Dm2、Dm3…,电源线电阻Rt1、Rt2、Rt 3…,电源线电阻Rm1、Rm2、Rm3…,以及电阻Rn1、Rn2、Rn3…也从图5的左侧按照编号顺序排列。 Note that the transfer thyristors T1 , T2 , T3 . . . are arranged in numerical order in FIG. 5 . Here, transfer thyristors T1 , T2 , T3 . . . are arranged from the left side in FIG. 5 , such as T1 , T2 , T3 . . . Similarly, memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . . . and light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 . . . are also arranged in numerical order from the left side of FIG. 5 . In addition, coupling diodes Dc1, Dc2, Dc3..., connection diodes Dm1, Dm2, Dm3..., power line resistors Rt1, Rt2, Rt3..., power line resistors Rm1, Rm2, Rm3..., and resistors Rn1, Rn2, Rn3... They are also numbered sequentially from the left in Figure 5. the
接下来,将描述发光芯片C1(C)中的元件之间的电连接。 Next, electrical connections between elements in the light-emitting chip C1 (C) will be described. the
转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…的阳极端子,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的阳极端子和发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…的阳极端子连接到发光芯片C1(C)的基板80(公共阳极)。这些阳极端子通过基板80所设置的Vsub端子连接到电源线104(参见图4)。基准电势Vsub被提供到该电源线104。 The anode terminals of the transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3..., the anode terminals of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3... and the anode terminals of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3... are connected to the substrate 80 (common anode) of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) . These anode terminals are connected to the power supply line 104 (see FIG. 4 ) through the Vsub terminal provided on the
转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…的栅极端子Gt1、Gt2、Gt3…通过各个电源线电阻Rt1、Rt2、Rt3…连接到电源线71,各个电源线电阻Rt1、Rt2、Rt3…与各个转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…对应地设置。电源线71连接到Vga端子。Vga端子连接到电源线105(参见图4),并且电源电势Vga被提供到Vga端子。 The gate terminals Gt1, Gt2, Gt3... of the transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3... , T2, T3... set accordingly. The power line 71 is connected to the Vga terminal. The Vga terminal is connected to the power supply line 105 (see FIG. 4 ), and a power supply potential Vga is supplied to the Vga terminal. the
根据转移晶闸管T的阵列,奇数编号的转移晶闸管T1、T3、T5…的阴极端子连接到第一转移信号线72。第一转移信号线72通过限流电阻R1连接到作为第一转移信号φ1的输入端子的φ1端子。第一转移信号线106(参见图4)连接到该φ1端子,并且第一转移信号φ1被提供到该φ1端子。 According to the array of transfer thyristors T, the cathode terminals of odd-numbered transfer thyristors T1 , T3 , T5 . . . are connected to the first
同时,根据转移晶闸管T的阵列,偶数编号的转移晶闸管T2、T4、T6…的阴极端子连接到第二转移信号线73。第二转移信号线73 通过限流电阻R2连接到作为第二转移信号φ2的输入端子的φ2端子。第二转移信号线107(参见图4)连接到该φ2端子,并且第二转移信号φ2被提供到该φ2端子。 Meanwhile, according to the array of transfer thyristors T, cathode terminals of even-numbered transfer thyristors T2 , T4 , T6 . . . are connected to the second
存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的阴极端子通过对应的电阻Rn1、Rn2、Rn3…连接到存储器信号线74。存储器信号线74连接到作为存储器信号φm(在发光芯片C1的情况下为φm1)的输入端子的φm端子。存储器信号线108(参见图4:在发光芯片C1的情况下为存储器信号线108_1)连接到该φm端子,并且存储器信号φm(参见图4:在发光芯片C1的情况下为存储器信号φm1)被提供到该φm端子。 The cathode terminals of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . . . are connected to the
转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…的各个栅极端子Gt1、Gt2、Gt3…根据一一对应关系通过各个连接二极管Dm1、Dm2、Dm3…连接到存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的编号与所连接的栅极端子Gt相同的一个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3。换言之,连接二极管Dm1、Dm2、Dm3…的阳极端子分别连接到转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…的栅极端子Gt1、Gt2、Gt3…,连接二极管Dm1、Dm2、Dm3…的阴极端子分别连接到存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…。 The gate terminals Gt1, Gt2, Gt3 of the transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3... are connected to the storage thyristors M1, M2, M3... according to the one-to-one correspondence. One of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, and Gm3 having the same gate terminal Gt. In other words, the anode terminals of the connection diodes Dm1, Dm2, Dm3... are respectively connected to the gate terminals Gt1, Gt2, Gt3... of the transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3..., and the cathode terminals of the connection diodes Dm1, Dm2, Dm3... are respectively connected to the memory Gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 . . . of the thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . . . the
这里,如果不区分栅极端子Gt1、Gt2、Gt3…和栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…,则它们被分别称为栅极端子Gt和栅极端子Gm。 Here, if the gate terminals Gt1 , Gt2 , Gt3 . . . and the gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 . . . are not distinguished, they are referred to as the gate terminal Gt and the gate terminal Gm, respectively. the
存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的各个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…通过各个电源线电阻Rm1、Rm2、Rm3…连接到电源线71,各个电源线电阻Rm1、Rm2、Rm3…与各个存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…对应地设置。电源线71连接到Vga端子。Vga端子连接到电源线105(参见图4),并且电源电势Vga被提供到Vga端子。 The respective gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 . . . of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . M1, M2, M3... are set accordingly. The power line 71 is connected to the Vga terminal. The Vga terminal is connected to the power supply line 105 (see FIG. 4 ), and a power supply potential Vga is supplied to the Vga terminal. the
另外,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的各个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…按照一一对应的关系连接到发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…的编号与所连接的栅极端子Gm相同的对应一个栅极端子Gl1、Gl2、Gl3…。 In addition, the respective gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, ... of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3 ... are connected in a one-to-one relationship to the corresponding numbers of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3 ... that are the same as the connected gate terminals Gm. One gate terminal Gl1, Gl2, Gl3.... the
各个耦合二极管Dc1、Dc2、Dc3…连接在如下各对栅极端子Gt之间,所述各对栅极端子Gt是发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…的栅极端子Gt1、Gt2、Gt3…中的按照编号顺序形成的两个栅极端子Gt。换言之, 每个耦合二极管Dc1、Dc2、Dc3…串联连接到栅极端子Gt1、Gt2、Gt3…的对应两个。耦合二极管Dc1连接为使得其方向是电流从栅极端子Gt1流向栅极端子Gt2的方向。把相同的配置应用于其它的耦合二极管Dc2、Dc3、Dc4…。 Each coupling diode Dc1, Dc2, Dc3... is connected between each pair of gate terminals Gt of the gate terminals Gt1, Gt2, Gt3... of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3... Two gate terminals Gt are formed in numerical order. In other words, each coupling diode Dc1 , Dc2 , Dc3 . . . is connected in series to corresponding two of the gate terminals Gt1 , Gt2 , Gt3 . . . The coupling diode Dc1 is connected such that its direction is the direction in which current flows from the gate terminal Gt1 to the gate terminal Gt2. Apply the same configuration to the other coupling diodes Dc2, Dc3, Dc4.... the
发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…的阴极端子连接到点亮信号线75,而点亮信号线75连接到作为点亮信号φI(在发光芯片C1的情况下为点亮信号φI1)的输入端子的φI端子。点亮信号线109(参见图4:在发光芯片C1的情况下为点亮信号线109_1)连接到φI端子,并且点亮信号φI(参见图4:在发光芯片C1的情况下为点亮信号φI1)提供到φI端子。注意,如图4所示,对于其它发光芯片C2到C60的φI端子,点亮信号φI1到φI30分别被提供到每个都由两个发光芯片C组成的对应发光芯片对。 The cathode terminals of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, . . . are connected to the
位于转移晶闸管阵列一端侧的转移晶闸管T1的栅极端子Gt1连接到启动二极管Ds的阴极端子。同时,启动二极管Ds的阳极端子连接到第二转移信号线73。 The gate terminal Gt1 of the transfer thyristor T1 located on one end side of the transfer thyristor array is connected to the cathode terminal of the start diode Ds. Meanwhile, the anode terminal of the start diode Ds is connected to the second
(发光部分的操作) (Operation of the light emitting part)
接下来,将描述发光部分63的操作。如图4所示,第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2组成的一对被共同提供到构成发光部分63的发光芯片C(C1到C60)。同时,基于图像数据集的存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)被单独提供到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)被分别提供到每个都由两个发光芯片C组成的对应发光芯片对,从而由构成每一对的两个发光芯片C共用每个点亮信号φI,并且点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)被单独提供到构成不同对的发光芯片C。 Next, the operation of the
发光芯片C(C1到C60)使用第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2组成的信号对并行地执行顺序操作(点亮控制),使得发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)和熄灭。这里,使得发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)并熄灭的顺序操作被称为点亮控制。 The light-emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ) perform sequential operations (lighting control) in parallel using a signal pair composed of the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2 , so that the light-emitting thyristors L light up (emit light) and extinguish. Here, the sequential operation of causing the light-emitting thyristor L to turn on (emit light) and turn off is referred to as lighting control. the
因此,如果描述了发光芯片C1的操作,则就会了解发光部分63 的操作。此后,将以发光芯片C1作为实例来描述发光芯片C的操作。(发光芯片的点亮控制) Therefore, if the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 is described, the operation of the light-emitting
图6是说明发光芯片C1(C)的操作概要的示意图。 FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C). the
在第一示例性实施例中,利用由事先设置的多个发光点(发光晶闸管L)构成的一组,在发光芯片C1(C)中执行点亮控制。 In the first exemplary embodiment, lighting control is performed in the light-emitting chip C1 (C) using a group consisting of a plurality of light-emitting points (light-emitting thyristors L) set in advance. the
图6示出了使用由8个发光晶闸管L构成的一组来执行点亮控制的情况。换言之,在第一示例性实施例中,同时使得多达8个发光晶闸管L点亮。首先,在图6中,对8个发光晶闸管L1到L8执行点亮控制,如从发光芯片C1(C)左侧开始的组#A所示(稍后所述的图7中所示的点亮控制时段T(#A))。接下来,对与组#A相邻的组#B中的8个发光晶闸管L9到L16执行点亮控制(稍后所述的图7中所示的点亮控制时段T(#B))。随后,对示为组#C的8个发光晶闸管L17到L24执行点亮控制。如果发光芯片C所设置的发光晶闸管L的数量为128,则按照类似的方式对8个发光晶闸管L重复执行点亮控制,直到对发光晶闸管L128执行点亮控制为止。 FIG. 6 shows a case where lighting control is performed using a set of eight light-emitting thyristors L. As shown in FIG. In other words, in the first exemplary embodiment, up to eight light-emitting thyristors L are simultaneously made to light up. First, in FIG. 6 , lighting control is performed on the eight light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 as shown in group #A from the left side of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) (the point shown in FIG. 7 described later bright control period T(#A)). Next, lighting control is performed on the eight light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 in group #B adjacent to group #A (lighting control period T(#B) shown in FIG. 7 described later). Subsequently, lighting control is performed on the eight light-emitting thyristors L17 to L24 shown as group #C. If the number of light-emitting thyristors L provided in the light-emitting chip C is 128, the lighting control of eight light-emitting thyristors L is repeated in a similar manner until the lighting control of the light-emitting thyristor L128 is performed. the
换言之,在第一示例性实施例中,按照时间先后顺序依次对组#A、#B…执行点亮控制,并且在组#A、#B中的每一组中同时对多个发光点(发光晶闸管L)执行点亮控制。 In other words, in the first exemplary embodiment, lighting control is sequentially performed on the groups #A, #B... in chronological order, and a plurality of light-emitting points ( The light-emitting thyristor L) performs lighting control. the
(驱动波形) (drive waveform)
图7是说明第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1(C)操作的时序图。在图7中,假定时间按照字母顺序从时间点(时刻)a到时间点y。这里示出了第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1、点亮信号φI1、以及在各个存储器晶闸管M1到M8的阳极端子和阴极端子之间流动的电流J(M1)到J(M8)的波形。 FIG. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) in the first exemplary embodiment. In FIG. 7 , it is assumed that time is from time point (moment) a to time point y in alphabetical order. Here, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1, the lighting signal φI1, and the currents J(M1) to J flowing between the anode terminals and the cathode terminals of the respective memory thyristors M1 to M8 are shown. (M8) waveform. the
图7示出了对由图6所示的8个发光晶闸管L构成的每个组执行点亮控制的情况,并且主要示出了在对组#A中的发光晶闸管L1到L8执行点亮控制时从时间点c到时间点y的点亮控制时段T(#A)。注意,点亮控制时段T(#A)的后面是在对组#B中的发光晶闸管L9到L16 执行点亮控制时的点亮控制时段T(#B),在对组#C中的发光晶闸管L17到L24执行点亮控制时的点亮控制时段T(#C),等等。 FIG. 7 shows a case where lighting control is performed for each group composed of eight light-emitting thyristors L shown in FIG. is the lighting control period T(#A) from time point c to time point y. Note that the lighting control period T(#A) is followed by the lighting control period T(#B) when the lighting control is performed on the light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 in the group #B, and the lighting control period T(#B) in the group #C The lighting control period T(#C) when the thyristors L17 to L24 perform lighting control, and so on. the
图7示出了使得组#A中的8个发光晶闸管L1到L8中的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8点亮(发光)并且保持8个发光晶闸管L1到L8中的发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7熄灭的情况。换言之,假定在点亮控制时段T(#A)中执行图像数据集“11101001”的打印。 FIG. 7 shows lighting up (emission of light) of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 of the eight light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in group #A and keeping light-emitting thyristor L4 of the eight light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 , L6 and L7 are off. In other words, assume that printing of the image data set "11101001" is performed in the lighting control period T(#A). the
对于每个点亮控制时段(如点亮控制时段T(#A)、点亮控制时段T(#B)…),重复第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2和点亮信号φI1(φI)的波形。另一方面,尽管存储器信号φm1(φm)具有根据图像数据集发生改变的部分,但是存储器信号的基本部分在每个点亮控制时段(如点亮控制时段T(#A)、点亮控制时段T(#B)…)中重复。因此,只要描述了点亮控制时段T(#A),就可以了解这些波形。注意,作为点亮控制时段T(#A)的前时段的从时间点a到时间点c的时段是用于启动发光芯片C1(C)的操作的时段。在对操作的描述中将说明这一时段。 For each lighting control period (such as lighting control period T(#A), lighting control period T(#B)...), the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2 and the lighting signal φI1 (φI ) waveform. On the other hand, although the memory signal φm1 (φm) has a portion that changes depending on the image data set, the basic portion of the memory signal is changed every lighting control period such as lighting control period T(#A), lighting control period T(#A), lighting control period Repeat in T(#B)...). Therefore, these waveforms can be understood as long as the lighting control period T(#A) is described. Note that the period from time point a to time point c, which is a preceding period of the lighting control period T(#A), is a period for starting the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C). This period will be explained in the description of the operation. the
首先,将描述点亮控制时段T(#A)中的第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1(φm)和点亮信号φI1(φI)的波形。 First, the waveforms of the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1 (φm), and the lighting signal φI1 (φI) in the lighting control period T(#A) will be described. the
第一转移信号φ1在点亮控制时段T(#A)的开始时间点c处具有低电平的电势(下文称为“L”),并且在时间点f处从“L”变成高电平的电势(下文称为“H”),随后在时间点i处从“H”变成“L”。在时间点k处,第一转移信号φ1的电势保持在“L”。随后,与从时间点c到时间点k的时段相同的波形在从时间点k到时间点w的时段中重复三次。在时间点w处,第一转移信号φ1的电势为“L”,而在作为点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点的时间点y处,第一转移信号φ1的电势保持在“L”。 The first transfer signal φ1 has a low-level potential (hereinafter referred to as “L”) at the start time point c of the lighting control period T(#A), and changes from “L” to a high level at the time point f. A flat potential (hereinafter referred to as "H"), which then changes from "H" to "L" at time point i. At the time point k, the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 is kept at "L". Subsequently, the same waveform as the period from time point c to time point k is repeated three times in the period from time point k to time point w. At the time point w, the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 is “L”, and at the time point y which is the end time point of the lighting control period T(#A), the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 is kept at “L”. L". the
第二转移信号φ2在时间点c处为“H”,在时间点e处从“H”变成“L”,随后在时间点j处,从“L”变成“H”。在时间点k处,第二转移信号φ2的电势保持在“H”。随后,与从时间点c到时间点k的时段相同的波形在从时间点k到时间点w的时段中重复三次。 在时间点w处,第二转移信号φ2的电势为“H”,而在作为点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点的时间点y处,第二转移信号φ2的电势保持在“H”。 The second transition signal φ2 is "H" at time point c, changes from "H" to "L" at time point e, and then changes from "L" to "H" at time point j. At the time point k, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is kept at "H". Subsequently, the same waveform as the period from time point c to time point k is repeated three times in the period from time point k to time point w. At the time point w, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is "H", and at the time point y which is the end time point of the lighting control period T(#A), the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is kept at "H". H". the
这里,在从时间点c到时间点w的时段内将第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2相互比较的情况下,在从时间点c到时间点k的时段内,第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2中的每一个都具有交替重复“H”和“L”的电势,中间插入了两个电势都为“L”的时段(例如,从时间点e到时间点f,或从时间点i到时间点j)。不存在第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2同时为“H”的时段。第二转移信号φ2是第一转移信号φ1向右移位了与时间轴上从时间点f到时间点j的时段对应的时段的信号。与从时间点f到时间点j的时段对应的时段是第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2中每一个的重复周期(稍后描述的时段t 1的两倍时段)的一半。 Here, in the case where the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2 are compared with each other in the period from the time point c to the time point w, in the period from the time point c to the time point k, the first transfer signal φ1 Each of the and second transfer signals φ2 has potentials that alternately repeat "H" and "L" with a period in which both potentials are "L" inserted (for example, from time point e to time point f, or From time point i to time point j). There is no period in which the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2 are “H” at the same time. The second transfer signal φ2 is a signal in which the first transfer signal φ1 is shifted rightward by a period corresponding to the period from time point f to time point j on the time axis. The period corresponding to the period from the time point f to the time point j is half the repetition period (twice the period of the period t1 described later) of each of the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2. the
接下来,将描述存储器信号φm1(φm)。从时间点c到时间点g的时段是把图像数据集写入存储器晶闸管M1中时的写入时段T(M1),而从时间点g到时间点k的时段是把图像数据集写入存储器晶闸管M2中时的写入时段T(M2)。类似地,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中,设置有把图像数据集写入到各个存储器晶闸管M3到M8中时的写入时段T(M3)到T(M8)。注意,如果不区分写入时段T(M1)到T(M8),则它们被称为写入时段T(M)。 Next, the memory signal φm1 (φm) will be described. The period from time point c to time point g is the writing period T(M1) when the image data set is written into the memory thyristor M1, and the period from time point g to time point k is when the image data set is written into the memory The writing period T(M2) when the thyristor M2 is in. Similarly, in the lighting control period T(#A), there are provided writing periods T(M3) to T(M8) when image data sets are written into the respective memory thyristors M3 to M8. Note that if the writing periods T(M1) to T(M8) are not distinguished, they are referred to as writing periods T(M). the
这些写入时段T(M1)到T(M8)等于相同时段t1。 These writing periods T(M1) to T(M8) are equal to the same period t1. the
根据构成图像数据集“11101001”的第一位“1”,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在写入时段T(M1)的开始时间点c处从“H”变成“L”,在时间点d处其电势从“L”变成“H”。随后,其电势保持在“H”直到作为写入时段T(M1)的结束时间点的时间点g为止。在作为写入时段T(M2)的开始时间点的时间点g处,根据图像数据集“11101001”的第二位“1”,其电势再次从“H”变成“L”,在时间点h处,其电势从“L”变成“H”。随后,其电势保持在“H”直到作为写入时段T(M2)的结束时间点的时间点k为止。换言之,写入时段T(M1)中的波形在写入时段T(M2)中重复。而且,在与图像数据 集“11101001”的第三位“1”对应的写入时段T(M3)中,也重复了相同的波形。 According to the first bit "1" constituting the image data set "11101001", the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from "H" to "L" at the start time point c of the writing period T(M1), at time Its potential changes from "L" to "H" at point d. Subsequently, its potential is kept at "H" until a time point g which is an end time point of the writing period T( M1 ). At the time point g which is the start time point of the writing period T(M2), according to the second bit "1" of the image data set "11101001", its potential is changed from "H" to "L" again, at the time point At h, its potential changes from "L" to "H". Subsequently, its potential is maintained at "H" until time point k which is the end time point of the writing period T( M2 ). In other words, the waveform in the writing period T(M1) is repeated in the writing period T(M2). Also, in the writing period T(M3) corresponding to the third bit "1" of the image data set "11101001", the same waveform is repeated. the
同时,在作为写入时段T(M4)的开始时间点的时间点m处,根据图像数据集“11101001”的第四位“0”,其电势从“H”变成存储器电平电势(下文称为“S”),在时间点n处,其电势从“S”变成“H”。其电势保持在“H”直到作为写入时段T(M4)的结束时间点的时间点o为止。换言之,在时间点m处从“H”到“S”的变化不同于上面描述的在时间点c、g和k处从“H”到“L”的变化。注意,存储器电平电势“S”是处于“H”和“L”之间的电势,表示使得接通之后被关断的存储器晶闸管M准备在预定时段之后接通的电势电平,稍后将对其进行具体描述。注意,将对晶闸管的接通和关断进行具体描述。 Meanwhile, at the time point m which is the start time point of the writing period T(M4), according to the fourth bit "0" of the image data set "11101001", its potential changes from "H" to a memory level potential (hereinafter Called "S"), at time point n, its potential changes from "S" to "H". Its potential is kept at "H" until the time point o which is the end time point of the writing period T ( M4 ). In other words, the change from "H" to "S" at time point m is different from the change from "H" to "L" at time points c, g, and k described above. Note that the memory level potential "S" is a potential between "H" and "L", indicating a potential level such that the memory thyristor M, which is turned off after being turned on, is ready to be turned on after a predetermined period of time, which will be described later. Describe it in detail. Note that the turning on and off of the thyristor will be specifically described. the
随后,在写入时段T(M5)中,根据图像数据集“11101001”的第五位“1”,重复写入时段T(M1)中的波形。在接下来的写入时段T(M6)和写入时段T(M7)中,根据图像数据集“11101001”的第六位和第七位“0”,分别重复写入时段T(M4)中的波形。 Subsequently, in the writing period T(M5), according to the fifth bit "1" of the image data set "11101001", the waveform in the writing period T(M1) is repeated. In the following writing period T(M6) and writing period T(M7), according to the sixth and seventh digits "0" of the image data set "11101001", the writing period T(M4) is repeated respectively waveform. the
其后,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在作为写入时段T(M8)的开始时间点的时间点r处根据图像数据集“11101001”的第八位“1”从“H”变成“L”,在时间点s处,其电势从“L”变成“S”。随后,在时间点u处,该电势从“S”变成“H”。在写入时段T(M8)的结束时间点w处,其电势保持在“H”。 Thereafter, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “ L", at time point s, its potential changes from "L" to "S". Subsequently, at time point u, the potential changes from "S" to "H". At the end time point w of the writing period T ( M8 ), its potential is kept at "H". the
随后,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势保持在“H”直到作为点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点的时间点y为止。 Subsequently, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is maintained at “H” until the time point y which is the end time point of the lighting control period T(#A). the
注意,存储器信号φm1(φm)在上述写入时段T(M1)到T(M8)的每个开始时间点处从“H”到“L”的变化或者从“H”到“S”的变化取决于把发光晶闸管L(每一个都具有与对应的存储器晶闸管M相同的编号)设定成点亮或熄灭的图像数据集,在发光控制时段T(#A)中对这些发光晶闸管L同时执行点亮控制。具体地说,当图像数据集为“1”并且使得发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)时,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”。同时,当图像数据集为“0”并且发光晶闸管L保持为熄灭(不发光)时,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从 “H”变成“S”。 Note that the change of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “H” to “L” or from “H” to “S” at each start time point of the above-mentioned writing period T(M1) to T(M8) Depending on the image data set for setting the light-emitting thyristors L (each having the same number as the corresponding memory thyristor M) to be turned on or off, the light-emitting thyristors L are simultaneously performed in the light-emitting control period T(#A). Light control. Specifically, when the image data set is "1" and the light-emitting thyristor L is caused to light (emit light), the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from "H" to "L". Simultaneously, when the image data set is "0" and the light-emitting thyristor L is kept off (not emitting light), the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from "H" to "S". the
如上所述,在写入时段T(M1)到T(M8)的每个开始时间点处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势根据图像数据集从“H”变成“L”和“S”中的任一个。除了在写入时段T(M8)之外,其电势在经过时段t2之后从“L”和“S”中的任一个变成“H”。注意,在写入时段T(M8)中,在经过时段t2之后,其电势变成“S”。稍后将描述写入时段T(M8)中的操作。 As described above, at each start time point of the writing period T(M1) to T(M8), the potential of the memory signal φm1(φm) changes from “H” to “L” and “S” according to the image data set any of the The potential thereof is changed from any one of "L" and "S" to "H" after the elapse of the period t2 except in the writing period T ( M8 ). Note that, in the writing period T ( M8 ), after the period t2 elapses, its potential becomes "S". The operation in the writing period T(M8) will be described later. the
在存储器信号φm1(φm)与第一转移信号φ1和第转移信号φ2中的每一个之间的关系中,当第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2中的任一个为“L”时,在写入时段T(M1)到T(M8)的每个开始时间点处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”和“S”中的任一个。例如,在写入时段T(M1)中第一转移信号φ1为“L”时的时间点c处,在写入时段T(M2)中第二转移信号φ2为“L”时的时间点g处,存储器信号φm1为“L”。同时,在第二转移信号φ2为“L”时的时间点m处,存储器信号φm1为“S”。在写入时段T(M3)和T(M5)到T(M8)中也是这样。 In the relationship between the memory signal φm1 (φm) and each of the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2, when either of the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2 is “L”, At each start time point of the writing period T( M1 ) to T( M8 ), the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to any one of “L” and “S”. For example, at a time point c when the first transfer signal φ1 is “L” in the writing period T(M1), at a time point g when the second transfer signal φ2 is “L” in the writing period T(M2) At , the memory signal φm1 is "L". Meanwhile, at a time point m when the second transition signal φ2 is “L”, the memory signal φm1 is “S”. The same is true in the writing periods T(M3) and T(M5) to T(M8). the
点亮信号φI1(φI)是把电流提供到发光晶闸管L用于点亮(发光)的信号,这如稍后所述。 The lighting signal φI1 (φI) is a signal to supply current to the light-emitting thyristor L for lighting (emission of light), which will be described later. the
点亮信号φI在点亮控制时段T(#A)的开始时间点c处为“H”,其电势在时间点t处变成发光电平电势(下文称为“Le”)。其电势在时间点x处从“Le”变成“H”。随后,在点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点y处,其电势保持在“H”。 The lighting signal φI is "H" at a start time point c of the lighting control period T(#A), and its potential becomes a light emission level potential (hereinafter referred to as "Le") at a time point t. Its potential changes from "Le" to "H" at time point x. Subsequently, at the end time point y of the lighting control period T(#A), its potential is kept at "H". the
注意,发光电平电势“Le”表示根据图像数据集被指定点亮的发光晶闸管L准备好接通的电势电平(发光电平),这如稍后所述。稍后将描述晶闸管的接通。 Note that the light emission level potential "Le" represents the potential level (light emission level) at which the light emitting thyristor L specified to be lit according to the image data set is ready to be turned on, as will be described later. Turning on of the thyristor will be described later. the
(晶闸管的基本操作) (Basic operation of thyristor)
在描述发光芯片C1(C)的操作之前,将描述晶闸管(转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L)的基本操作。这些晶闸管(转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L)是如下半导体器件: 每一个半导体器件都有三个端子,分别是阳极端子(阳极)、阴极端子(阴极)和栅极端子(栅极)。 Before describing the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C), basic operations of the thyristors (transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M, and light-emitting thyristor L) will be described. These thyristors (transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M and light-emitting thyristor L) are semiconductor devices as follows: Each semiconductor device has three terminals, namely the anode terminal (anode), cathode terminal (cathode) and gate terminal (gate) . the
在下文,如图5所述,作为实例,提供到晶闸管阳极端子(Vsub端子)的基准电势Vsub被设定为0V(“H”),提供到Vga端子的电源电势Vga被设定为-3.3V(“L”)。每一个晶闸管都具有pnpn结构,其中p型层、n型层、p型层和n型层(诸如GaAs、GaAlAs等)依次顺序层叠在基板80上,该基板具有p导电型(诸如GaAs、GaAlAs等),p-n结的扩散电势(正向电势)Vd被设定为1.3V。 Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 5, as an example, the reference potential Vsub supplied to the thyristor anode terminal (Vsub terminal) is set to 0 V (“H”), and the power supply potential Vga supplied to the Vga terminal is set to −3.3 V("L"). Each thyristor has a pnpn structure, wherein a p-type layer, an n-type layer, a p-type layer and an n-type layer (such as GaAs, GaAlAs, etc.) etc.), the diffusion potential (forward potential) Vd of the p-n junction was set to 1.3V. the
当低于阈值电压的电势(负值较小的电势)被施加到阴极端子时,具有上述结构的晶闸管接通(有时称为导通)。当晶闸管接通时,晶闸管进入导通状态,其中电流在其阳极端子与阴极端子之间流动。这里,晶闸管的阈值电压是通过从栅极端子电势减去扩散电势Vd得到的值。因此,如果晶闸管的栅极端子电势为-1.3V时,扩散电势vd为1.3V,由此得到阈值电压为-2.6V。因此,当小于-2.6V的电势(<-2.6V)被施加到阴极端子时,晶闸管接通。 A thyristor having the above-described structure is turned on (sometimes referred to as conduction) when a potential lower than a threshold voltage (potential with a less negative value) is applied to the cathode terminal. When the thyristor is turned on, the thyristor enters a conducting state where current flows between its anode and cathode terminals. Here, the threshold voltage of the thyristor is a value obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd from the gate terminal potential. Therefore, if the gate terminal potential of the thyristor is -1.3V, the diffusion potential vd is 1.3V, and thus the threshold voltage is -2.6V. Thus, when a potential less than -2.6V (<-2.6V) is applied to the cathode terminal, the thyristor turns on. the
随后,当晶闸管接通时,晶闸管栅极端子的电势接近阳极端子的电势。阳极端子被设定在基准电势Vsub(0V),由此栅极端子的电势变成接近0V的电势(准确地说是-0.2V,如稍后所述)。注意,在下面的描述中,已经接通的晶闸管的栅极端子的电势按照简单易懂的方式假定为0V。 Subsequently, when the thyristor is turned on, the potential of the gate terminal of the thyristor approaches the potential of the anode terminal. The anode terminal is set at the reference potential Vsub (0V), whereby the potential of the gate terminal becomes a potential close to 0V (to be precise -0.2V, as described later). Note that in the following description, the potential of the gate terminal of the thyristor that has been turned on is assumed to be 0V in a simple and understandable manner. the
这里,晶闸管的阴极端子具有扩散电势Vd。扩散电势Vd为1.3V,由此阴极端子的电势为-1.3V。 Here, the cathode terminal of the thyristor has a diffusion potential Vd. The diffusion potential Vd is 1.3V, so the potential of the cathode terminal is -1.3V. the
一旦晶闸管接通,晶闸管就处于导通状态,同时阴极端子的电势小于或等于晶闸管导通时的电势。当晶闸管处于导通状态时,即使栅极端子的电势发生各种变化,晶闸管的导通状态也不会变成关断(OFF)状态。另一方面,当阴极端子具有超过导通状态时电势的高电势(在负电势侧大于阈值电压(或者绝对值小于阈值电压)的电势、或者大于或等于0V的电势)时,晶闸管不会保持导通状态并且关断。 Once the thyristor is turned on, the thyristor is in the conducting state while the potential at the cathode terminal is less than or equal to the potential at which the thyristor is conducting. When the thyristor is in the on state, even if the potential of the gate terminal changes variously, the on state of the thyristor does not change to the off (OFF) state. On the other hand, when the cathode terminal has a high potential (a potential greater than the threshold voltage (or an absolute value smaller than the threshold voltage) on the negative potential side, or a potential greater than or equal to 0 V) exceeding the on-state potential, the thyristor does not hold on state and off. the
这里,在处于导通状态的晶闸管中,阴极端子的电势为-1.3V。因此,如果施加到阴极端子的电势小于或等于-1.3V(≤-1.3V),则 保持导通状态。同时,超过-1.3V(>-1.3V)的高电压被施加到阴极端子,晶闸管关断(有些情况称为截止)。在阴极端子被设定为“H”(0V)从而阳极端子和阴极端子具有相同电势的情况下,晶闸管也关断。当晶闸管关断时,晶闸管进入这样的状态(关断状态):导通电流不在阳极端子和阴极端子之间流动。 Here, in the thyristor in the on state, the potential of the cathode terminal is -1.3V. Therefore, if the potential applied to the cathode terminal is less than or equal to -1.3V (≤ -1.3V), the ON state is maintained. At the same time, a high voltage exceeding -1.3V (>-1.3V) is applied to the cathode terminal, and the thyristor is turned off (called cutoff in some cases). In case the cathode terminal is set to "H" (0V) so that the anode and cathode terminals have the same potential, the thyristor is also turned off. When the thyristor is turned off, the thyristor enters a state (off state) in which conduction current does not flow between the anode terminal and the cathode terminal. the
如上所述,在导通状态下,保持了导通电流流入晶闸管的状态,并且晶闸管不会根据栅极端子的电势关断。换言之,通过设定导通状态,晶闸管具有存储和保持功能。 As described above, in the ON state, the state in which ON current flows into the thyristor is maintained, and the thyristor does not turn off according to the potential of the gate terminal. In other words, by setting the on-state, the thyristor has a storage and hold function. the
如上所述,与使得晶闸管接通所需的电势相比,保持晶闸管导通状态的电势较低是可接受的。 As mentioned above, it is acceptable that the potential at which the thyristor is turned on is lower than the potential required to turn the thyristor on. the
注意,当接通时,发光晶闸管L点亮(发光),而关断时,发光晶闸管L熄灭(不发光)。 Note that when turned on, the light-emitting thyristor L lights up (emits light), and when turned off, the light-emitting thyristor L turns off (does not emit light). the
如上所述,通过使用栅极端子的电势改变阈值电压来接通晶闸管,并且改变阴极端子的电势来关断晶闸管。 As described above, the thyristor is turned on by changing the threshold voltage using the potential of the gate terminal, and turned off by changing the potential of the cathode terminal. the
(发光芯片的操作) (Operation of light-emitting chip)
参考图5,根据图7所示的时序图来描述发光部分63和发光芯片C的操作。 Referring to FIG. 5 , operations of the
(初始状态) (initial state)
在图7所示的时序图中的时间点a处,在发光部分63的发光芯片C(C1到C60)的每一个基板80上设置的Vsub端子被设定在基准电势Vsub(0V)(“H”)。同时,每个Vga端子被设定在电源电势Vga(-3.3V)(“L”)(参见图4)。 At time point a in the timing chart shown in FIG. 7, the Vsub terminal provided on each
而且,信号生成电路100的转移信号生成单元120把第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2设定在“H”,存储器信号生成单元130把存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)设定在“H”,而点亮信号生成单元110把点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)设定在“H”(参见图4)。借此操作,第一转移信号线106变成“H”,由此每个发光芯片C的第一转移信号线72通过发光部分63中的每个发光芯片C的φ1端子变成“H”。类似地,第二转移信号线107变成“H”,由此每个发光 芯片C的第二转移信号线73通过每个发光芯片C的φ2端子变成“H”。存储器信号线108(108_1到108_60)变成“H”,由此每个发光芯片C的存储器信号线74通过每个发光芯片C的φm端子变成“H”。另外,点亮信号线109(109_1到109_30)变成“H”,由此每个发光芯片C的点亮信号线75通过每个发光芯片C的φI端子变成“H”。 Also, the transfer
在下文,把发光芯片C1作为实例来描述发光芯片C的操作。其它发光芯片C2到C60类似于发光芯片C1进行操作,并且同时与发光芯片C1并行进行操作。 Hereinafter, the operation of the light-emitting chip C is described taking the light-emitting chip C1 as an example. The other light emitting chips C2 to C60 operate similarly to the light emitting chip C1 and simultaneously operate in parallel with the light emitting chip C1. the
由于发光芯片C1(C)的转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…以及发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…的阳极端子连接到Vsub端子,所以向Vsub端子提供“H”(0V)。 Since the anode terminals of the transfer thyristors T1, T2, T3..., memory thyristors M1, M2, M3... and light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3... of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) are connected to the Vsub terminal, "H" is supplied to the Vsub terminal. (0V). the
同时,由于奇数编号的转移晶闸管T1、T3、T5…的阴极端子连接到设定在“H”的第一转移信号线72,而偶数编号的转移晶闸管T2、T4、T6…的阴极端子连接到设定在“H”的第二转移信号线73,所以转移晶闸管T的阳极端子和阴极端子变成“H”。因此,每个转移晶闸管T处于关断状态。 Meanwhile, since the cathode terminals of odd-numbered transfer thyristors T1, T3, T5, . The second
类似地,由于存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的阴极端子连接到设定在“H”的存储器信号线74,所以阳极端子和阴极端子变成“H”。因此,每个存储器晶闸管M处于关断状态。 Similarly, since the cathode terminals of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . . . are connected to the
另外,由于发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3…的阴极端子连接到设定在“H”的发光信号φI(在发光芯片C 1的情况下为发光信号φI1),所以发光晶闸管L的阳极端子和阴极端子变成“H”。因此,每个发光晶闸管L处于关断状态。 Also, since the cathode terminals of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3... The terminal becomes "H". Therefore, each light emitting thyristor L is in an off state. the
另一方面,转移晶闸管T的栅极端子Gt、存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm以及发光晶闸管L的栅极端子Gl中的每一个都通过电源线电阻Rt和Rm中的任一个连接到电源线71。通过Vga端子为电源线71提供电源电势Vga。因此,除了稍后所述的情况之外,这些栅极端子Gt、Gm和Gl的电势均为电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。 On the other hand, each of the gate terminal Gt of the transfer thyristor T, the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M, and the gate terminal G1 of the light-emitting thyristor L is connected to the power supply line through any one of the power supply line resistances Rt and Rm. 71. The power supply line 71 is supplied with a power supply potential Vga through the Vga terminal. Therefore, the potentials of these gate terminals Gt, Gm, and G1 are the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V) except for the case described later. the
如上所述,位于图5中的转移晶闸管阵列一端侧的栅极端子Gt1连接到启动二极管Ds的阴极端子。启动二极管Ds的阳极端子连接到 设定在“H”的第二转移信号线73。因此,由于连接到栅极端子Gt1的启动二极管Ds的阴极端子通过电源线电阻Rt连接到电源线71,所以启动二极管Ds的阳极端子意在具有“L”(-3.3V)的电势。同时,阳极端子的电势为“H”(0V),由此启动二极管D s进入沿正向对启动二极管施加电场的状态(正向偏置状态)。结果,启动二极管Ds的阴极端子(栅极端子Gt1)的电势变成-1.3V,该电势是通过从为启动二极管Ds的阳极端子设定的“H”(0V)减去扩散电压Vd(1.3V)而得到的。 As described above, the gate terminal Gt1 located at one end side of the transfer thyristor array in FIG. 5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the start diode Ds. The anode terminal of the start diode Ds is connected to the second
因此,如上所述,转移晶闸管T1的阈值电压变成-2.6V,该电压是通过从栅极端子Gt1的电势(-1.3V)减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。 Therefore, as described above, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T1 becomes -2.6V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) from the potential of the gate terminal Gt1 (-1.3V). the
注意,与转移晶闸管T1相邻的转移晶闸管T2的栅极端子Gt2通过耦合二极管Dc1连接到栅极端子Gt1,由此栅极端子Gt2的电势变成-2.6V,该电势是通过从栅极端子Gt1的电势(-1.3V)减去耦合二极管Dc1的扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。因此,转移晶闸管T2的阈值电压变成-3.9V。 Note that the gate terminal Gt2 of the transfer thyristor T2 adjacent to the transfer thyristor T1 is connected to the gate terminal Gt1 through the coupling diode Dc1, whereby the potential of the gate terminal Gt2 becomes -2.6 V, which is obtained by switching from the gate terminal It is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) of the coupling diode Dc1 from the potential of Gt1 (-1.3V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T2 becomes -3.9V. the
注意,转移晶闸管T3的栅极端子Gt3通过耦合二极管Dc2连接到转移晶闸管T2的栅极端子Gt2,由此根据上述计算方法计算出栅极端子Gt3的电势为-3.9V。然而,栅极端子Gt3通过电源线电阻Rt3连接到电源电势Vga(“L”:-3.3V)。因此,栅极端子Gt3的电势的值不小于-3.3V,并且因此为-3.3V。因此,转移晶闸管T3的阈值电压为-4.6V。类似地设定各个编号不小于4的转移晶闸管T的阈值电压。 Note that the gate terminal Gt3 of the transfer thyristor T3 is connected to the gate terminal Gt2 of the transfer thyristor T2 through the coupling diode Dc2, whereby the potential of the gate terminal Gt3 is calculated to be -3.9V according to the calculation method described above. However, the gate terminal Gt3 is connected to the power supply potential Vga ("L": -3.3V) through the power supply line resistance Rt3. Therefore, the value of the potential of the gate terminal Gt3 is not less than -3.3V, and is therefore -3.3V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T3 is -4.6V. The threshold voltages of the transfer thyristors T whose respective numbers are not less than 4 are similarly set. the
类似地,存储器晶闸管M1的栅极端子Gm1(以及发光晶闸管L1的栅极端子Gl1)通过连接二极管Dm1连接到栅极端子Gt1,由此存储器晶闸管M1的栅极端子Gm1(以及栅极端子Gl1)的电势变成-2.6V,该电势是通过从栅极端子Gt1的电势(-1.3V)减去连接二极管Dm1的扩散电压Vd(1.3V)而得到的。因此,存储器晶闸管M1(发光晶闸管L1)的阈值电压变成-3.9V。 Similarly, the gate terminal Gm1 of the memory thyristor M1 (and the gate terminal Gl1 of the light-emitting thyristor L1) is connected to the gate terminal Gt1 through the connection diode Dm1, whereby the gate terminal Gm1 of the memory thyristor M1 (and the gate terminal Gl1) The potential of becomes -2.6V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion voltage Vd (1.3V) of the connection diode Dm1 from the potential of the gate terminal Gt1 (-1.3V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M1 (light-emitting thyristor L1) becomes -3.9V. the
注意,存储器晶闸管M2的栅极端子Gm2(发光晶闸管L2的栅极 端子Gl2也同样如此)通过耦合二极管Dc1和连接二极管Dm2连接到栅极端子Gt1。然而,栅极端子Gm2通过电源线电阻Rm2连接到电源线71。因此,与上述转移晶闸管T3的情况类似,存储器晶闸管M2的栅极端子Gm2(发光晶闸管L2的栅极端子Gl2也同样如此)的电势变成-3.3V。因此,存储器晶闸管M2(发光晶闸管L2)的阈值电压变成4.6V。类似地设定各个编号不小于3的存储器晶闸管M(以及发光晶闸管L)的阈值电压。 Note that the gate terminal Gm2 of the memory thyristor M2 (and the same for the gate terminal G12 of the light-emitting thyristor L2) is connected to the gate terminal Gt1 through the coupling diode Dc1 and the connection diode Dm2. However, the gate terminal Gm2 is connected to the power supply line 71 through the power supply line resistance Rm2. Therefore, similarly to the case of the transfer thyristor T3 described above, the potential of the gate terminal Gm2 of the memory thyristor M2 (and the gate terminal G12 of the light emitting thyristor L2 as well) becomes -3.3V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M2 (light-emitting thyristor L2) becomes 4.6V. The threshold voltages of the memory thyristors M (and light-emitting thyristors L) whose respective numbers are not less than 3 are similarly set. the
注意,即使晶闸管的阈值变化,第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1(φm)以及点亮信号φI1(φI)为“H”(0V),由此所有转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L都处于关断状态。 Note that even if the threshold of the thyristor changes, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1(φm), and the lighting signal φI1(φI) are “H” (0V), whereby all the transfer thyristors T, memory Both the thyristor M and the light-emitting thyristor L are in an off state. the
当第一转移信号φ1的电势在时间点b处从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)时,具有-2.6V阈值电压的转移晶闸管T1接通。然而,转移晶闸管T3之后的奇数编号的转移晶闸管T被提供给第转移信号φ1,阈值电压为-4.6V,由此这些转移晶闸管T没有接通。另外,由于第二转移信号φ2为“H”(0V),所以阈值电压为-3.9V的转移晶闸管T2没有接通。各个编号不小于4的偶数编号的转移晶闸管T没有接通,这是因为这些转移晶闸管的阈值电压为-4.6V的缘故。 When the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 changes from “H” (0 V) to “L” (−3.3 V) at time point b, the transfer thyristor T1 having a threshold voltage of −2.6 V is turned on. However, the odd-numbered transfer thyristors T after the transfer thyristor T3 are supplied with the transfer signal φ1, the threshold voltage is −4.6 V, and thus these transfer thyristors T are not turned on. In addition, since the second transfer signal φ2 is "H" (0V), the transfer thyristor T2 whose threshold voltage is -3.9V is not turned on. Even-numbered transfer thyristors T whose respective numbers are not less than 4 are not turned on because the threshold voltage of these transfer thyristors is -4.6V. the
注意,在时间点b处,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)和点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势保持在“H”,所以存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L中没有一个接通。换言之,在时间点b处,只有转移晶闸管T1接通。 Note that at time point b, since the potentials of the memory signal φm1 (φm) and the lighting signal φI1 (φI) are kept at “H”, neither the memory thyristor M nor the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on. In other words, at time point b, only the transfer thyristor T1 is switched on. the
当转移晶闸管T1接通时,如上所述,栅极端子Gt1的电势变成作为阳极端子电势的“H”(0V)。另外,转移晶闸管T1的阴极端子(第一转移信号线72)的电势变成-1.3V,该电势是通过从阳极端子电势“H”(0V)减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。 When the transfer thyristor T1 is turned on, as described above, the potential of the gate terminal Gt1 becomes "H" (0 V) which is the potential of the anode terminal. In addition, the potential of the cathode terminal (first transfer signal line 72 ) of the transfer thyristor T1 becomes -1.3 V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3 V) from the anode terminal potential "H" (0 V). . the
因此,耦合二极管Dc1的阳极端子的电势变成作为栅极端子Gt1的电势的0V,而作为耦合二极管Dc1的阴极端子的栅极端子Gt2的电势为-2.6V,由此耦合二极管Dc1进入正向偏置状态。在该状态下,栅极端子Gt2的电势变成-1.3V,该电势是通过从栅极端子Gt1的电 势(0V)减去耦合二极管Dc1的扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。因此,转移晶闸管T2的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 Therefore, the potential of the anode terminal of the coupling diode Dc1 becomes 0 V which is the potential of the gate terminal Gt1, and the potential of the gate terminal Gt2 which is the cathode terminal of the coupling diode Dc1 is −2.6 V, whereby the coupling diode Dc1 enters the forward direction. bias state. In this state, the potential of the gate terminal Gt2 becomes -1.3V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) of the coupling diode Dc1 from the potential of the gate terminal Gt1 (0V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T2 becomes -2.6V. the
可以使用上述方法计算通过耦合二极管Dc2连接到转移晶闸管T2的栅极端子Gt2的栅极端子Gt3的电势,该电势变成-2.6V。因此,转移晶闸管T3的阈值电压变成-3.9V。转移晶闸管T3之后的各个编号不小于4的转移晶闸管T的栅极端子Gt的电势保持在电源电势Vga(-3.3V),由此各个编号不小于4的转移晶闸管T的阈值电压保持在-4.6V。 The potential of the gate terminal Gt3 connected to the gate terminal Gt2 of the transfer thyristor T2 through the coupling diode Dc2 can be calculated using the method described above, which becomes -2.6V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T3 becomes -3.9V. The potential of the gate terminal Gt of each of the transfer thyristors T not less than 4 after the transfer thyristor T3 is maintained at the power supply potential Vga (-3.3 V), whereby the threshold voltage of each of the transfer thyristors T of not less than 4 is maintained at -4.6 V. the
当转移晶闸管T1接通并且栅极端子Gt1的电势变成“H”(0V)时,连接二极管Dm1被正向偏置。因此,栅极端子Gm1(栅极端子Gl1也同样如此)的电势变成-1.3V,该电势是通过从栅极端子Gt1的电势(0V)中减去连接二极管Dm1的扩散电压Vd(1.3V)而得到的。因此,存储器晶闸管M1(发光晶闸管L1也同样如此)的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 When the transfer thyristor T1 is turned on and the potential of the gate terminal Gt1 becomes "H" (0 V), the connection diode Dm1 is forward biased. Therefore, the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 (the same goes for the gate terminal Gl1) becomes -1.3 V by subtracting the diffusion voltage Vd (1.3 V) of the connection diode Dm1 from the potential (0 V) of the gate terminal Gt1. ) and obtained. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M1 (and the light-emitting thyristor L1 as well) becomes -2.6V. the
注意,与其相邻的存储器晶闸管M2的栅极端子Gm2(栅极端子Gl2也同样如此)的电势变成-2.6V,这是因为栅极端子Gm2通过彼此串联连接的耦合二极管Dc1和连接二极管Dm2连接到栅极端子Gt1的缘故。因此,存储器晶闸管M2(发光晶闸管L2也同样如此)的阈值电压变成-3.9V。 Note that the potential of the gate terminal Gm2 (the same goes for the gate terminal G12) of the memory thyristor M2 adjacent thereto becomes −2.6 V because the gate terminal Gm2 passes through the coupling diode Dc1 and the connection diode Dm2 connected in series to each other. connected to the gate terminal Gt1 for sake. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M2 (and the light-emitting thyristor L2 as well) becomes -3.9V. the
另外,各个编号不小于3的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm(发光晶闸管L的栅极端子G1)的电势保持在等于电源电势Vga的-3.3V。因此,各个编号不小于3的存储器晶闸管M(发光晶闸管L)的阈值电压保持在-4.6V。 In addition, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M (gate terminal G1 of the light-emitting thyristor L) of each number not less than 3 is maintained at −3.3 V equal to the power supply potential Vga. Therefore, the threshold voltages of the memory thyristors M (light-emitting thyristors L) whose respective numbers are not less than 3 are maintained at -4.6V. the
如上所述,紧接在时间点b之后(指示在晶闸管的状态等根据时间点b处的信号电势的变化而变化之后的时间点),只有转移晶闸管T1处于导通状态。 As described above, immediately after the time point b (indicating a time point after the state of the thyristor or the like changes according to the change in the signal potential at the time point b), only the transfer thyristor T1 is in the ON state. the
(操作状态) (operating status)
当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点c处从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)时,阈值电压为-2.6V的存储器晶闸管M1接通。 然而,存储器晶闸管M2和各个编号不小于3的存储器晶闸管M没有接通,这是因为存储器晶闸管M2的阈值电压为-3.9V,而各个编号不小于3的存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压为-4.6V的缘故。 When the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” (0 V) to “L” (−3.3 V) at time point c, the memory thyristor M1 having a threshold voltage of −2.6 V is turned on. However, the memory thyristor M2 and the memory thyristors M each numbered not less than 3 are not turned on because the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M2 is -3.9V and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristors M each numbered not less than 3 is -4.6V for the sake. the
换言之,在时间点c接通的存储器晶闸管M仅仅是存储器晶闸管M1。 In other words, the memory thyristor M turned on at time point c is only the memory thyristor M1. the
随后,如在电流J(M1)所示,导通电流Jo流入已经接通的存储器晶闸管M1。 Then, as shown in the current J(M1), the turn-on current Jo flows into the already turned-on memory thyristor M1. the
当存储器晶闸管M1接通时,与转移晶闸管T1的情况类似,栅极端子Gm1的电势变为“H”(0V)。随后,由于发光晶闸管L1的栅极端子Gl1连接到栅极端子Gm1,所以发光晶闸管L的阈值电压变为-1.3V。 When the memory thyristor M1 is turned on, similarly to the case of the transfer thyristor T1, the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 becomes "H" (0 V). Subsequently, since the gate terminal Gl1 of the light-emitting thyristor L1 is connected to the gate terminal Gm1, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L becomes -1.3V. the
注意,由于存储器晶闸管M2的栅极端子Gm2(发光晶闸管L2的栅极端子Gl2)通过正向偏置的连接二极管Dm2连接到变成-1.3V的栅极端子Gt2,所以存储器晶闸管M2的栅极端子Gm2(发光晶闸管L2的栅极端子Gl2)的电势为2.6V。因此,存储器晶闸管M2(发光晶闸管L2)的阈值电压变成-3.9V。 Note that since the gate terminal Gm2 of the memory thyristor M2 (the gate terminal G12 of the light-emitting thyristor L2) is connected to the gate terminal Gt2 which becomes -1.3V through the forward-biased connection diode Dm2, the gate terminal of the memory thyristor M2 The potential of the sub Gm2 (the gate terminal G12 of the light emitting thyristor L2) is 2.6V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M2 (light-emitting thyristor L2) becomes -3.9V. the
然而,由于栅极端子Gm(栅极端子Gl)的电压为-3.3V,所以各个编号不小于3的存储器晶闸管M(发光晶闸管L)的阈值电压为-4.6V。 However, since the voltage of the gate terminal Gm (gate terminal G1) is -3.3V, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristors M (light-emitting thyristors L) whose respective numbers are not less than 3 is -4.6V. the
因此,在时间点c处,各个编号不小于2的存储器晶闸管M不会接通。 Therefore, at the time point c, the memory thyristors M whose respective numbers are not less than 2 are not turned on. the
另外,由于点亮信号φI1(φI)为“H”(0V),所以没有发光晶闸管L接通。 In addition, since the lighting signal φI1 (φI) is “H” (0 V), no light-emitting thyristor L is turned on. the
因此,紧接着时间点c之后,转移晶闸管T1和存储器晶闸管M1保持在导通状态。 Therefore, immediately after the time point c, the transfer thyristor T1 and the memory thyristor M1 are kept in the on state. the
注意,如上所述,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M1的阴极端子的电势变成-1.3V,该电势是通过从阳极端子的电势(0V)减去扩散电压Vd(1.3V)而得到的。然而,由于存储器晶闸管M1通过电阻Rn1连接到存储器信号线74,所以存储器信号线74的电势保持在“L”(-3.3V)。 Note that, as described above, the potential of the cathode terminal of the memory thyristor M1 that has been turned on becomes -1.3V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion voltage Vd (1.3V) from the potential of the anode terminal (0V). However, since the memory thyristor M1 is connected to the
在上文已经分别描述了发光芯片C1(C)的晶闸管(转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L)和二极管(耦合二极管Dc和连接二极管Dm)的操作。然而,下面将描述晶闸管和二极管的操作。 The operations of the thyristors (transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M, and light emitting thyristor L) and diodes (coupling diode Dc and connection diode Dm) of the light emitting chip C1 (C) have been described above, respectively. However, the operations of the thyristors and diodes will be described below. the
具体地说,当晶闸管接通时,该晶闸管的栅极端子(栅极端子Gt、栅极端子Gm和栅极端子Gl)的电势变为“H”(0V)。 Specifically, when a thyristor is turned on, the potential of the gate terminal (gate terminal Gt, gate terminal Gm, and gate terminal G1) of the thyristor becomes “H” (0 V). the
随后,对于栅极端子没有通过任何二极管而与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管而言,该晶闸管的阈值电压为1.3V。 Then, the threshold voltage of the thyristor is 1.3V for the thyristor whose gate terminal is connected to the gate terminal at potential "H" (0V) without any diode. the
另外,通过一级正向偏置的二极管(一个二极管)与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的栅极端子的电势变为-1.3V,该电势是通过从“H”(0V)减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。因此,具有该栅极端子的晶闸管的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 In addition, the potential of the gate terminal connected to the gate terminal at the potential "H" (0 V) through one stage of forward biased diode (one diode) becomes -1.3 V by changing the potential from "H" ( 0V) minus the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the thyristor having this gate terminal becomes -2.6V. the
而且,通过两级正向偏置的二极管(彼此串联连接的两个二极管)与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的栅极端子的电势变成-2.6V,该电势是通过从“H”(0V)减去扩散电压Vd(1.3V)的两倍而得到的。因此,具有该栅极端子的晶闸管的阈值电压变成-3.9V。 Also, the potential of the gate terminal connected to the gate terminal at potential "H" (0 V) through two stages of forward-biased diodes (two diodes connected in series to each other) becomes -2.6 V, which is obtained by Obtained by subtracting twice the diffusion voltage Vd (1.3V) from "H" (0V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the thyristor having this gate terminal becomes -3.9V. the
另外,通过三级或更多级二极管与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的栅极端子通过电源线电阻(Rt或Rm)被提供电源电势Vga(-3.3V),并且因此仍受到电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子的影响。因此,该栅极端子的电势保持在电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。因此,具有该栅极端子的晶闸管的阈值电压变成-4.6V。 In addition, the gate terminal connected to the gate terminal at the potential "H" (0V) through three or more stages of diodes is supplied with the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V) through the power supply line resistance (Rt or Rm), and thus Still affected by the gate terminal at potential "H" (0V). Therefore, the potential of the gate terminal is kept at the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the thyristor having this gate terminal becomes -4.6V. the
没有通过任何二极管而与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管、以及栅极端子通过一级正向偏置的二极管与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管在电势“L”(-3.3V)或更小(或绝对值更大)处接通。同时,栅极端子通过两级或更多级的正向偏置的二极管与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管在电势“L”(-3.3V)处没有接通。 Thyristors connected to the gate terminal of potential "H" (0 V) without any diode, and whose gate terminal is connected to the gate terminal of potential "H" (0 V) through a forward-biased diode of one stage The thyristor turns on at potential "L" (-3.3V) or less (or greater in absolute value). Meanwhile, the thyristor whose gate terminal is connected to the gate terminal of potential "H" (0V) through two or more stages of forward biased diodes is not turned on at potential "L" (-3.3V). the
因此,唯一需要关注的是栅极端子没有通过任何二极管而与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管、以及栅极端子通过一级正向偏置的二极管与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管。 So the only concerns are thyristors whose gate terminal is connected to a potential "H" (0V) without a diode through any diode, and whose gate terminal is connected to a potential "H" through a primary forward biased diode ” (0V) to the gate terminal of the thyristor. the
在下文,仅描述在各个定时处栅极端子没有通过任何二极管而 与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管、以及栅极端子通过一级正向偏置的二极管与电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子连接的晶闸管。在各个定时处,将省略对没有接通的晶闸管、这些晶闸管的栅极端子的电势及其阈值电压的变化的描述。 Hereinafter, only a thyristor whose gate terminal is connected to a gate terminal at potential "H" (0 V) without any diode at each timing, and whose gate terminal is connected to a potential of "H" (0V) gate terminal of the thyristor connected. At each timing, descriptions of thyristors that are not turned on, potentials of gate terminals of these thyristors, and changes in threshold voltages thereof will be omitted. the
返回参考图7,将描述发光芯片C1(C)的其它操作。 Referring back to FIG. 7 , other operations of the light emitting chip C1 (C) will be described. the
在时间点d处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“L”变成“H”。随后,由于存储器晶闸管M1的阳极端子和阴极端子具有相同的电势“H”,所以存储器晶闸管M1关断。因此,如在电流J(M1)中所示,电流停止流入存储器晶闸管M1中。 At a time point d, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” to “H”. Subsequently, since the anode terminal and the cathode terminal of the memory thyristor M1 have the same potential "H", the memory thyristor M1 is turned off. Therefore, current stops flowing into memory thyristor M1 as shown in current J(M1). the
由于栅极端子Gm1通过电源线电阻Rm1连接到电源电势Vga(-3.3V),所以栅极端子Gm1的电势开始从“H”(0V)变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。换言之,在栅极端子Gm1的寄生电容中蓄积的电荷通过电源线电阻Rm1被释放。 Since the gate terminal Gm1 is connected to the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V) through the power supply line resistance Rm1, the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 starts to change from "H" (0V) to the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V). In other words, the charges accumulated in the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm1 are discharged through the power supply line resistance Rm1. the
紧接着时间点d之后,仅仅转移晶闸管T1保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the point in time d, only the transfer thyristor T1 remains in the conducting state. the
在时间点e处,第二转移信号φ2的电势从“H”变成“L”。随后,阈值电源为-2.6V的转移晶闸管T2接通。 At the time point e, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is changed from "H" to "L". Subsequently, the transfer thyristor T2 whose threshold power supply is -2.6V is turned on. the
当转移晶闸管T2接通时,栅极端子Gt 2的电势增大到“H”(0V)。而且,通过一级正向偏置的二极管(耦合二极管Dc2)连接到栅极端子Gt2的转移晶闸管T3的阈值电压变成-2.6V。类似地,通过一级二极管(连接二极管Dm2)连接到栅极端子Gt2的存储器晶闸管M2和发光晶闸管L2两者的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 When the transfer thyristor T2 is turned on, the potential of the gate terminal Gt2 increases to "H" (0V). Also, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T3 connected to the gate terminal Gt2 through a forward-biased diode (coupling diode Dc2) of one stage becomes -2.6V. Similarly, the threshold voltages of both the memory thyristor M2 and the light emitting thyristor L2 connected to the gate terminal Gt2 through the primary diode (connection diode Dm2 ) become -2.6V. the
此时,转移晶闸管T1保持在导通状态。因此,通过处于导通状态的转移晶闸管T1,与奇数编号的转移晶闸管T1、T3…的阴极端子相连的第一转移信号线72的电势保持在扩散电势Vd(-1.3V)。因此,转移晶闸管T3不会接通。 At this time, the transfer thyristor T1 remains in the on state. Therefore, the potential of the first
紧接着时间点e之后,两个转移晶闸管T1和T2都处于导通状态。 Immediately after the point in time e, both transfer thyristors T1 and T2 are in the conducting state. the
在时间点f处,第一转移信号φ1的电势φ1从“L”变成“H”。随后,转移晶闸管T1的阴极端子和阳极端子变成相同的电势“H”。因此,转移晶闸管T1不再保持在导通状态,并且由此关断。 At the time point f, the potential φ1 of the first transfer signal φ1 changes from “L” to “H”. Subsequently, the cathode terminal and the anode terminal of the transfer thyristor T1 become the same potential "H". Therefore, the transfer thyristor T1 is no longer kept in the conducting state, and is thus turned off. the
此时,转移晶闸管T1的栅极端子Gt1开始向电源电势Vga(-3.3V)变化,这是因为栅极端子Gt1通过电源线电阻Rt1连接到电源线71的缘故。通过这种变化,转移晶闸管T1和转移晶闸管T2之间的耦合二极管Dc1变为反向偏置。因此,栅极端子Gt2的电势“H”(0V)不再影响栅极端子Gt1。 At this time, the gate terminal Gt1 of the transfer thyristor T1 starts to change toward the power supply potential Vga (-3.3 V) because the gate terminal Gt1 is connected to the power supply line 71 through the power supply line resistance Rt1. With this change, the coupling diode Dc1 between the transfer thyristor T1 and the transfer thyristor T2 becomes reverse biased. Therefore, the potential "H" (0 V) of the gate terminal Gt2 no longer affects the gate terminal Gt1 . the
换言之,如上所述,电势“H”(0V)不会影响通过反向偏置的二极管与其相连的栅极端子。 In other words, as described above, the potential "H" (0 V) does not affect the gate terminal connected to it through the reverse biased diode. the
紧接在时间点f之后,转移晶闸管T2保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the time point f, the transfer thyristor T2 remains in the conducting state. the
在时间点g处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。随后,由于存储器晶闸管M2的阈值电压为-2.6V,所以存储器晶闸管M2接通。 At a time point g, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” (0 V) to “L” (−3.3 V). Subsequently, since the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M2 is -2.6V, the memory thyristor M2 is turned on. the
栅极端子Gm1在时间点d处开始从“H”(0V)变化到电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。该电势变化由时间常数确定,该时间常数由栅极端子Gm1的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm1定义。在时间点g处,如果栅极端子Gm1的电势保持在-2V或更大电势,则存储器晶闸管M1的阈值电压为-3.3V或更大。因此,在存储器信φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”(-3.3V)时的时间点g处,如果栅极端子Gm1的电势保持在-2V电势或更大,则存储器晶闸管M1也接通。 The gate terminal Gm1 starts changing from "H" (0 V) to the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V) at the time point d. This potential change is determined by a time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm1 and the power supply line resistance Rm1. At the time point g, if the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 is maintained at a potential of -2 V or more, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M1 is -3.3 V or more. Therefore, at the time point g when the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “L” (−3.3V), if the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 is kept at −2 V potential or more, the memory Thyristor M1 is also turned on. the
当存储器晶闸管M1和M2接通时,导通电流Jo流入存储器晶闸管M1和M2,这如在电流J(M1)和J(M2)中所示。随后,栅极端子Gm1和Gm2的电势变为“H”(0V)。 When the memory thyristors M1 and M2 are turned on, the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristors M1 and M2 as shown in the currents J(M1) and J(M2). Subsequently, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 and Gm2 become "H" (0 V). the
换言之,紧接着时间点g之后,转移晶闸管T2以及存储器晶闸管M1和M2处于导通状态。 In other words, immediately after the time point g, the transfer thyristor T2 and the memory thyristors M1 and M2 are in a conductive state. the
随后,当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点h处从“L”变成“H”时,存储器晶闸管M1和M2的阳极端子和阴极端子的电势均变成“H”,并且因此存储器晶闸管M1和M2两者关断。与时间点d的情况类似,栅极端子Gm1和Gm2的电势开始从“H”(0V)向着电源电势Vga(-3.3V)变化。因此,电流没有流入存储器晶闸管M1和M2,这如在电流J(M1)和J(M2)中所示。 Subsequently, when the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” to “H” at the time point h, the potentials of the anode terminals and the cathode terminals of the memory thyristors M1 and M2 both become “H”, and thus the memory Both thyristors M1 and M2 are turned off. Similar to the case of time point d, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 and Gm2 start to change from "H" (0 V) toward the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V). Therefore, current does not flow into memory thyristors M1 and M2, as shown in currents J(M1) and J(M2). the
紧接着时间点h之后,转移晶闸管T2保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the time point h, the transfer thyristor T2 remains in the conducting state. the
当第一转移信号φ1的电势在时间点i从“H”变成“L”时,阈值电压为-2.6V的转移晶闸管T3接通。随后,栅极端子Gt3的电势增加到“H”(0V)。另外,通过一级正向偏置的二极管(耦合二极管Dc3)连接到栅极端子Gt3的转移晶闸管T4的阈值电压变成-2.6V。类似地,栅极端子Gm3(栅极端子Gl3)通过一级二极管(连接二极管Dm3)连接到栅极端子Gt3的存储器晶闸管M3(存储器晶闸管L3)的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 When the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 changes from “H” to “L” at the time point i, the transfer thyristor T3 having a threshold voltage of −2.6 V is turned on. Subsequently, the potential of the gate terminal Gt3 increases to "H" (0 V). In addition, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T4 connected to the gate terminal Gt3 through a one-stage forward-biased diode (coupling diode Dc3 ) becomes -2.6V. Similarly, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M3 (memory thyristor L3 ) whose gate terminal Gm3 (gate terminal G13 ) is connected to the gate terminal Gt3 through a first-stage diode (connection diode Dm3 ) becomes -2.6V. the
此时,由于转移晶闸管T2保持在导通状态,所以通过处于导通状态的转移晶闸管T2,与偶数编号的转移晶闸管T2、T4…的阴极端子相连的第二转移信号线73保持在扩散电势Vd(-1.3V)的电势处。因此,转移晶闸管T4没有接通。 At this time, since the transfer thyristor T2 is kept in the on state, the second
紧接着时间点i之后,两个转移晶闸管T2和T3保持在导通状态。 Immediately after time point i, the two transfer thyristors T2 and T3 remain in the conducting state. the
在时间点j处,第二转移信号φ2的电势从“L”变成“H”。随后,由于转移晶闸管T2的阴极端子和阳极端子两者的电势都变成“H”,所以转移晶闸管T2不会保持在导通状态,并且由此转移晶闸管T2关断。 At time point j, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 changes from "L" to "H". Subsequently, since the potentials of both the cathode terminal and the anode terminal of the transfer thyristor T2 become "H", the transfer thyristor T2 does not remain in the on state, and thus the transfer thyristor T2 turns off. the
此时,由于转移晶闸管T2的栅极端子Gt2通过电源线电阻Rt2连接到电源线71,所以栅极端子Gt2的电势开始从“H”(0V)变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。随后,转移晶闸管T2与转移晶闸管T3之间的耦合二极管Dc2变成反向偏置,并且由此已变成“H”(0V)的栅极端子Gt3不会影响栅极端子Gt2。 At this time, since the gate terminal Gt2 of the transfer thyristor T2 is connected to the power supply line 71 through the power supply line resistance Rt2, the potential of the gate terminal Gt2 starts to change from "H" (0V) to the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V). Subsequently, the coupling diode Dc2 between the transfer thyristor T2 and the transfer thyristor T3 becomes reverse biased, and thus the gate terminal Gt3 which has become "H" (0 V) does not affect the gate terminal Gt2 . the
紧接着时间点j之后,转移晶闸管T3保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the time point j, the transfer thyristor T3 remains in the conducting state. the
从时间点k到时间点m的写入时段T(M3)重复写入时段T(M1)。如在时间点g处的操作所述,在时间点k处,存储器晶闸管M1和M2的栅极端子Gm1和Gm2的电势为-2V或更大,存储器晶闸管M1和M2的阈值电压为-3.3V或更大。因此,在时间点k处,如果存储器信号φm1(φm)从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V),则除了阈值电压为-2.6V的存储器晶闸管M3之外,存储器晶闸管M1和M2也准备接通。随后,如在电流J(M1)、J(M2)和J(M3)中所示,导通电流Jo流入存 储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3。栅极端子Gm1、Gm2和Gm3的电势变成0V。 The writing period T( M1 ) is repeated from the writing period T( M3 ) from the time point k to the time point m. As described in the operation at time point g, at time point k, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 and Gm2 of the memory thyristors M1 and M2 are -2 V or more, and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristors M1 and M2 is -3.3 V or larger. Therefore, at time point k, if the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” (0V) to “L” (-3.3V), the memory thyristors except the memory thyristor M3 whose threshold voltage is -2.6V M1 and M2 are also ready to be switched on. Then, as shown in the currents J(M1), J(M2) and J(M3), the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristors M1, M2 and M3. The potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, and Gm3 become 0V. the
换言之,紧接着时间点k之后,转移晶闸管T3和存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3保持在导通状态。存储器晶闸管M4的阈值电压为-2.6V。 In other words, immediately after the time point k, the transfer thyristor T3 and the memory thyristors M1 , M2 and M3 are kept in the on state. The threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M4 is -2.6V. the
随后,当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点l处从“L”(-3.3V)变成“H”(0V)时,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3关断,电流不会流入存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3中,这如在电流J(M1)、J(M2)和J(M3)中所示。另外,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2和Gm3的电势开始从0V变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。 Subsequently, when the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” (-3.3V) to “H” (0V) at time point l, the memory thyristors M1, M2, and M3 are turned off, and current does not flow into the memory In thyristors M1 , M2 and M3 this is shown in currents J(M1 ), J(M2) and J(M3). In addition, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , and Gm3 of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , and M3 start to change from 0 V to the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V). the
接下来,将描述从时间点m到时间点o的写入时段T(M4)。在时间点m处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“S”。在时间点m处,存储器晶闸管M4的阈值电压为-2.6V。然而,与“L”不同,“S”被设定在阈值电压为-2.6V的存储器晶闸管M没有接通时的电势。例如,“S”被设定在-2.5V。 Next, the writing period T( M4 ) from time point m to time point o will be described. At a time point m, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “S”. At time point m, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M4 is -2.6V. However, unlike "L", "S" is set at a potential when the memory thyristor M whose threshold voltage is -2.6V is not turned on. For example, "S" is set at -2.5V. the
然而,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2和Gm3的电势在时间点l处开始从0V变成-3.3V。随后,在时间点m处,如果这些栅极端子Gm1、Gm2和Gm3的电势为-1.2V或更大,则存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3的阈值电压变成-2.5V或更大。因此,当存储器信号φm1(φm)在时间点m处从“H”变成“S”(-2.5V)时,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3再次接通。然而,如上所述,存储器晶闸管M4没有接通。 However, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , and Gm3 of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , and M3 start changing from 0 V to −3.3 V at
由于存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势为“S”,所以流入到已经接通的存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3中的电流变成小于导通电流Jo的保持电流Js,这如在电流J(M1)、J(M2)和J(M3)中所示。注意,由于存储器晶闸管M4处于关断状态,所以没有电流流入该存储器晶闸管M4,这如在电流J(M4)中所示。 Since the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is “S”, the current flowing into the memory thyristors M1, M2, and M3 that have been turned on becomes the holding current Js smaller than the conduction current Jo, as in the current J(M1 ), J(M2) and J(M3). Note that since the memory thyristor M4 is in the off state, no current flows into the memory thyristor M4 as shown in Current J(M4). the
因此,紧接着时间点m之后,转移晶闸管T4和存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3处于导通状态。 Therefore, immediately after the time point m, the transfer thyristor T4 and the memory thyristors M1 , M2 and M3 are in a conductive state. the
如上所述,在时间点m处,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3被设定在导通状态,而存储器晶闸管M4被设定在关断状态。 As described above, at the time point m, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , and M3 are set in the on state, and the memory thyristor M4 is set in the off state. the
换言之,通过为存储器信号φm设定除“H”和“L”之外的电 势电压“S”,当存储器信号φm的电势从“H”变成“S”时,使得在接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M再次接通,而还没有接通的存储器晶闸管M保持没有接通。即,通过根据情况使用这两个电平“S”和“L”,选择是否接通存储器晶闸管M。 In other words, by setting the potential voltage "S" other than "H" and "L" for the memory signal φm, when the potential of the memory signal φm is changed from "H" to "S", it is made to turn off after being turned on. The memory thyristor M that was turned off is turned on again, while the memory thyristor M that has not been turned on remains off. That is, by using these two levels "S" and "L" according to circumstances, whether to turn on the memory thyristor M is selected. the
因此,当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”,或者从“H”变成“S”时,接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M(例如,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3)的栅极端子Gm的电势会变成某一值以上,该值是通过把扩散电势Vd(1.3V)添加到“S”而得到的(在“S”为-2.5V的情况下,该值为-1.2V)。 Therefore, when the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “L”, or from “H” to “S”, the memory thyristor M (for example, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , which are turned off after being turned on) and M3) the potential of the gate terminal Gm becomes above a certain value obtained by adding the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) to "S" (in the case of "S" being -2.5V , the value is -1.2V). the
从时间点o到时间点p的下一个写入时段T(M5)重复写入时段T(M3),但是转移晶闸管T和存储器晶闸管M具有不同的编号。类似地,从时间点p到时间点q的写入时段T(M6)和从时间点q到时间点r的写入时段T(M7)重复写入时段T(M4)。因此,省略其具体描述。 The next writing period T( M5 ) from the time point o to the time point p repeats the writing period T( M3 ), but the transfer thyristor T and the memory thyristor M have different numbers. Similarly, the writing period T( M6 ) from the time point p to the time point q and the writing period T( M7 ) from the time point q to the time point r repeat the writing period T( M4 ). Therefore, its detailed description is omitted. the
接下来将描述时间点r和随后的时段。 The time point r and subsequent periods will be described next. the
在时间点r处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。随后,由于存储器晶闸管M8在写入时段T(M7)的阈值电压为-2.6V,所以存储器晶闸管M8接通。存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3和Gm5的电势保持在-1.2V或更大的电压,由此存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5的阈值电压为-2.5V或更大。因此,在时间点r处,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5接通。 At a time point r, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” (0 V) to “L” (−3.3 V). Subsequently, since the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M8 in the writing period T(M7) is -2.6V, the memory thyristor M8 is turned on. The potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, and Gm5 of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 are maintained at a voltage of -1.2 V or more, whereby the threshold voltage of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 is -2.5 V V or greater. Therefore, at time point r, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 and M5 are turned on. the
换言之,紧接着时间点r之后,转移晶闸管T8和存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5处于导通状态。 In other words, immediately after the time point r, the transfer thyristor T8 and the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 and M5 are in a conductive state. the
对于流入到存储器晶闸管M中的电流,在时间点r处,导通电流Jo流入存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8,这如在电流J(M1)、J(M2)、J(M3)、J(M5)和J(M8)中所示。同时,没有电流流入存储器晶闸管M4、M6和M7中,这如在电流J(M4)、J(M6)和J(M7)中所示。 For the current flowing into the memory thyristor M, at the time point r, the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5 and M8, which is as in the currents J(M1), J(M2), J(M3 ), J(M5) and J(M8). At the same time, no current flows into memory thyristors M4, M6 and M7, as shown in currents J(M4), J(M6) and J(M7). the
在时间点s处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“L”变成“S”。由于处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M的阴极电压为-1.3V,所以存储器电平电势“S”(-2.5V)使得这些存储器晶闸管M保持在导通状态。 At a time point s, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” to “S”. Since the cathode voltage of the memory thyristors M in the on state is -1.3V, the memory level potential "S" (-2.5V) keeps these memory thyristors M in the on state. the
此时,保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8中, 这如在电流J(M1)、J(M2)、J(M3)、J(M5)和J(M8)中所示。同时,没有电流流入处于关断状态的存储器晶闸管M4、M6和M7中。 At this time, the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5, and M8 as shown in the currents J(M1), J(M2), J(M3), J(M5) and J(M8). Show. At the same time, no current flows into the memory thyristors M4, M6 and M7 which are in the OFF state. the
处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势为“H”(0V)。因此,栅极端子Gl1、Gl2、Gl3、Gl5和Gl8分别连接到各个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8的阈值电压为-1.3V。同时,由于处于关断状态的各个存储器晶闸管M4、M6和M7的栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7通过各个电源线电阻Rm4、Rm6和Rm7连接到电源电势Vga(-3.3V),所以栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7保持在-3.3V。因此,各个栅极端子Gl4、Gl6和Gl7连接到各个栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7的发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7的阈值电压为-4.6V。 The potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 , Gm5 , and Gm8 of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 , and M8 in the on state are “H” (0 V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 whose gate terminals Gl1 , Gl2 , Gl3 , Gl5 , and Gl8 are respectively connected to the respective gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 , Gm5 , and Gm8 is −1.3V. Meanwhile, since the gate terminals Gm4, Gm6, and Gm7 of the respective memory thyristors M4, M6, and M7 in the off state are connected to the power supply potential Vga (-3.3 V) through the respective power supply line resistances Rm4, Rm6, and Rm7, the gate terminals Gm4, Gm6 and Gm7 are kept at -3.3V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristors L4, L6, and L7 connected to the respective gate terminals Gl4, Gl6, and Gl7 to the respective gate terminals Gm4, Gm6, and Gm7 is -4.6V. the
由于转移晶闸管T8处于导通状态,所以栅极端子Gt8的电势为0V。设置为与发光晶闸管L8相邻并且通过两级正向偏置二极管(耦合二极管Dc8和图中未示出的连接二极管Dm9)连接到栅极端子Gt8的发光晶闸管L9(图中未示出)的栅极端子Gl9(图中未示出)的电势为-2.6V。因此,发光晶闸管L9的阈值电压为-3.9V。另外,由于各个编号不小于10的发光晶闸管L的栅极端子Gl的电势等于电源电势Vga(-3.3V),所以这些发光晶闸管L的阈值电压为-4.6V。 Since the transfer thyristor T8 is in the on state, the potential of the gate terminal Gt8 is 0V. The light-emitting thyristor L9 (not shown in the figure) disposed adjacent to the light-emitting thyristor L8 and connected to the gate terminal Gt8 through two stages of forward-biased diodes (coupling diode Dc8 and connection diode Dm9 not shown in the figure) The potential of the gate terminal G19 (not shown in the figure) is -2.6V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L9 is -3.9V. In addition, since the potential of the gate terminal G1 of each of the light-emitting thyristors L not smaller than 10 is equal to the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V), the threshold voltage of these light-emitting thyristors L is -4.6V. the
换言之,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8的阈值电压为-1.3V,发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7的阈值电压为-4.6V,发光晶闸管L9的阈值电压为-3.9V,而各个编号不小于10的发光晶闸管L的阈值电压为-4.6V。 In other words, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5 and L8 is -1.3V, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristors L4, L6 and L7 is -4.6V, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L9 is -3.9V, and each number The threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L not less than 10 is -4.6V. the
随后,存储器信号φm1(φm)保持在电势“S”直到时间点u为止。在该时段内,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8保持在导通状态。 Subsequently, the memory signal φm1 (φm) is maintained at the potential “S” until the time point u. During this period, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 and M8 are kept in the on state. the
在以上描述中,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在写入时段T(M8)的时间点r处从“H”变成“L”,从而除了使得发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3和L5点亮之外,还使得发光晶闸管L8点亮。然而,在不使得发光晶闸管L8点亮的情况下,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在写入时段T(M8)的开始时间点r处从“H”变成“S”。 In the above description, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is changed from “H” to “L” at the time point r of the writing period T(M8), thereby causing the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, and L5 to light up. In addition, the light-emitting thyristor L8 is also turned on. However, without causing the light-emitting thyristor L8 to light up, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “S” at the start time point r of the writing period T( M8 ). the
这里,为了描述点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势“Le”,将描述在不使得发光晶闸管L8点亮的情况下发光晶闸管L8的阈值电压。 Here, in order to describe the potential "Le" of the lighting signal φI1 (φI), the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L8 without causing the light-emitting thyristor L8 to light will be described. the
在不使得发光晶闸管L8点亮的情况下,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点r处从“H”(0V)变成“S”(-2.5V)。然而,由于存储器晶闸管M8的阈值电压为-2.6V,所以存储器晶闸管M8没有接通。同时,如上所述,由于存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3和Gm5的电势保持在-1.2V或更大,所以存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5的阈值电压为-2.5V或更大。因此,在时间点r处,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5接通。随后,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5的栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3和Gm5都变成0V。由此,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3和L5的阈值电压都变成-1.3V,这是因为连接到各个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3和Gm5的栅极端子Gl1、Gl2、Gl3和Gl5都变成0V的缘故。 Without causing the light-emitting thyristor L8 to light, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” (0 V) to “S” (−2.5 V) at the time point r. However, since the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M8 is -2.6V, the memory thyristor M8 is not turned on. Meanwhile, as described above, since the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, and Gm5 of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 are kept at -1.2 V or more, the threshold values of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 The voltage is -2.5V or greater. Therefore, at time point r, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 and M5 are turned on. Subsequently, the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, and Gm5 of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 all become 0V. Thus, the threshold voltages of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, and L5 all become −1.3 V because the gate terminals Gl1, Gl2, Gl3, and Gl5 connected to the respective gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, and Gm5 are all becomes 0V for sake. the
由于转移晶闸管T8处于导通状态,所以其栅极端子Gt8的电势为0V。另外,由于发光晶闸管L8的栅极端子Gl8通过一级正向偏置二极管(连接二极管Dm8)连接到栅极端子Gt8,所以栅极端子Gl8的电势变成-1.3V。因此,发光晶闸管L8的阈值电压变成-2.6V。即,在有些情况下,发现没有点亮的发光晶闸管L的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 Since the transfer thyristor T8 is in an on state, the potential of its gate terminal Gt8 is 0V. In addition, since the gate terminal G18 of the light-emitting thyristor L8 is connected to the gate terminal Gt8 through the one-stage forward bias diode (connection diode Dm8), the potential of the gate terminal G18 becomes -1.3V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the light emitting thyristor L8 becomes -2.6V. That is, in some cases, it was found that the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L that was not lit became -2.6V. the
注意,除了发光晶闸管L8之外,其它发光晶闸管L的阈值电压都与上述同样使得发光晶闸管L8点亮的情况下的阈值电压相同。 Note that, except for the light-emitting thyristor L8, the threshold voltages of the other light-emitting thyristors L are the same as those in the above case where the light-emitting thyristor L8 is also turned on. the
具体地说,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3和L5的阈值电压为-1.3V,发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7的阈值电压为-4.6V,发光晶闸管L8的阈值电压为-2.6V,发光晶闸管L9的阈值电压为-3.9,而各个编号不小于10的发光晶闸管L的阈值电压为-4.6V。 Specifically, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L1, L2, L3 and L5 is -1.3V, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L4, L6 and L7 is -4.6V, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L8 is -2.6V, and the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L9 The threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L is -3.9, and the threshold voltage of each light-emitting thyristor L whose number is not less than 10 is -4.6V. the
在该时段中,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5保持在导通状态。 During this period, the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 are kept in the on state. the
如上所述,要点亮的发光晶闸管L的阈值电压为-1.3V,而不引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的阈值电压为-2.6V或更小(≤-2.6)。 As described above, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L to be turned on is -1.3V, and the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L not to be turned on is -2.6V or less (≦-2.6). the
因此,为了使得将要点亮的发光晶闸管L点亮,点亮信号φI1(φI)的点亮电平电势“Le”被设定在大于-2.6V并且不大于-1.3V之间的值(-2.6<“Le”≤-1.3)。 Therefore, in order to light the light-emitting thyristor L to be lit, the lighting level potential "Le" of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) is set at a value between more than -2.6V and not more than -1.3V (- 2.6<"Le"≤-1.3). the
在时间点t处,点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势从“H”变成“Le”。随后,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8接通并且点亮(发光),这是因为其阈值电压为-1.3V的缘故。此时,由于为点亮信号φI1(φI)提供了电流驱动,所以点亮信号线75的电势没有变成处于导通状态的发光晶闸管L的阴极端子的电势,并且使得多个发光晶闸管L同时点亮。 At a time point t, the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “H” to “Le”. Subsequently, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are turned on and lighted (emit light) because their threshold voltage is -1.3V. At this time, since the current drive is given to the lighting signal φI1 (φI), the potential of the
然而,由于除了这些发光晶闸管L之外其它发光晶闸管L的阈值电压为-2.6V或更小,所以它们没有接通和点亮(不发光) However, since the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristors L other than these light-emitting thyristors L is -2.6V or less, they are not turned on and lit (no light is emitted).
因此,紧接着时间点t之后,转移晶闸管T8和存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8保持在导通状态,而发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Therefore, immediately after the time point t, the transfer thyristor T8 and the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5, and M8 are kept in a conducting state, while the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are kept in a lighted (conducting) state. state. the
在时间点u处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“S”变成“H”。随后,由于存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8的阴极端子和阳极端子都变成电势“H”,所以存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8不再保持在导通状态,并且由此它们关断。因此,没有电流流入存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8,这如电流J(M1)到J(M8)中所示。 At time point u, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” to “H”. Subsequently, since both the cathode terminal and the anode terminal of the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5 and M8 become potential "H", the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5 and M8 are no longer kept in the conduction state, and by Therefore they are turned off. Therefore, no current flows into the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 and M8 as shown in currents J(M1 ) to J(M8). the
在相同时间点u处,第一转移信号φ1的电势从“H”变成“L”。随后,阈值电压为-2.6V的转移晶闸管T9接通。而且,转移晶闸管T10的阈值电压被设定在-2.6V。此外,由于转移晶闸管T9(图5中未示出)的栅极端子Gt9(图5中未示出)的电势变成0V,由此通过一级正向二极管(连接二极管Dm9(图5中未示出))与栅极端子Gt9相连的存储器晶闸管M9(图5中未示出)的栅极端子Gm9(图5中未示出)的电势变成-1.3V,并且存储器晶闸管M9的阈值电压变成-2.6V。此时,即使存储器信号φm1(φm)保持在电势“S”,存储器晶闸管M9也没有接通。另外,即使存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势变成“H”,存储器晶闸管M9也没有接通。 At the same time point u, the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 changes from "H" to "L". Subsequently, the transfer thyristor T9 with a threshold voltage of -2.6V is turned on. Also, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T10 is set at -2.6V. In addition, since the potential of the gate terminal Gt9 (not shown in FIG. 5 ) of the transfer thyristor T9 (not shown in FIG. 5 ) becomes 0 V, thereby the Shown)) The potential of the gate terminal Gm9 (not shown in FIG. 5) of the memory thyristor M9 (not shown in FIG. 5) connected to the gate terminal Gt9 becomes −1.3 V, and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M9 becomes -2.6V. At this time, even if the memory signal φm1 (φm) is kept at the potential "S", the memory thyristor M9 is not turned on. In addition, even if the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) becomes “H”, the memory thyristor M9 is not turned on. the
紧接着时间点u之后,转移晶闸管T8和T9保持在导通状态,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point u, the transfer thyristors T8 and T9 are kept in the on state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 are kept in the lighted (on) state. the
注意,在第一示例性实施例中,在时间点u处,存储器信号φm1(φm)从“S”到“H”的电势变化和第一转移信号φ1从“H”到“L” 的电势变化同时进行。如上所述,即使存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势为“S”或“H”,存储器晶闸管M9也没有接通。因此,即使首先进行这些变化中的任一个,都不会有问题。 Note that in the first exemplary embodiment, at the time point u, the potential change of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “S” to “H” and the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 from “H” to “L” Changes happen simultaneously. As described above, even if the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is “S” or “H”, the memory thyristor M9 is not turned on. Therefore, there is no problem even if any of these changes are made first. the
在时间点v处,第二转移信号φ2的电势从“L”变成“H”。随后,转移晶闸管T8的阴极端子和阳极端子两者的电势变成“H”,所以转移晶闸管T8不再保持在导通状态,并且由此转移晶闸管T8关断。 At the time point v, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 changes from "L" to "H". Subsequently, the potentials of both the cathode terminal and the anode terminal of the transfer thyristor T8 become "H", so the transfer thyristor T8 is no longer kept in the on state, and thus the transfer thyristor T8 is turned off. the
紧接着时间点v之后,转移晶闸管T9保持在导通状态,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point v, the transfer thyristor T9 remains in the ON state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 remain in the lighted (conducting) state. the
在时间点x处,点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势从“Le”变成“H”。随后,由于发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8的阴极端子和阳极端子的电势均变成“H”,所以发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8不再保持在导通状态,并且由此它们关断并熄灭。换言之,在从时间点t到时间点x的时段(发光时段t4)内,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8已经点亮。 At the time point x, the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “Le” to “H”. Subsequently, since the potentials of the cathode terminals and the anode terminals of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 both become "H", the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are no longer kept in the conduction state, and They are thus switched off and extinguished. In other words, the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 have been turned on during the period from the time point t to the time point x (light-emitting period t4 ). the
紧接着时间点x之后,转移晶闸管T9保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the time point x, the transfer thyristor T9 remains in the conducting state. the
在时间点y处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”。随后,阈值电压为-2.6V的存储器晶闸管M9接通。 At a time point y, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “L”. Subsequently, the memory thyristor M9 having a threshold voltage of -2.6V is turned on. the
从时间点y开始的时段为驱动图6中所示的组#B(发光晶闸管L9到L16)时的点亮控制时段T(#B)。除了根据图像数据集而设置的存储器信号φm1(φm)之外,点亮控制时段T(#B)重复点亮控制时段(#A)。换言之,点亮控制时段T(#B)的时间点y对应于点亮控制时段T(#A)的时间点c。随后的点亮控制时段T(#C)…与上述相同。 The period from the time point y is the lighting control period T(#B) when the group #B (light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 ) shown in FIG. 6 is driven. The lighting control period T(#B) repeats the lighting control period (#A) except for the memory signal φm1 (φm) set according to the image data set. In other words, the time point y of the lighting control period T(#B) corresponds to the time point c of the lighting control period T(#A). The subsequent lighting control period T(#C)... is the same as above. the
在第一示例性实施例中,根据图像数据集“11101001”,在点亮控制时段T(#A)的发光时段t4中使得发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8同时点亮(发光)。 In the first exemplary embodiment, according to the image data set "11101001", the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are caused to light up (emit light) simultaneously in the light-emitting period t4 of the light-up control period T(#A) . the
下面将对以上描述进行总结。 The above description will be summarized below. the
在第一示例性实施例中,转移晶闸管T具有这样的时段(例如,从时间点e到时间点f的时段),在该时段中通过使用第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2使两个相邻的转移晶闸管T都进入导通状 态,并且转移晶闸管T被设定成按照编号顺序从关断状态变成导通状态,并且从导通状态变成关断状态。换言之,按照转移晶闸管阵列的编号顺序变换导通状态。 In the first exemplary embodiment, the transfer thyristor T has a period (for example, a period from time point e to time point f) in which both Each of the adjacent transfer thyristors T enters the conduction state, and the transfer thyristors T are set to change from the off state to the conduction state and from the conduction state to the off state in numerical order. In other words, the conduction state is changed according to the number sequence of the transfer thyristor array. the
在第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2中的任一个具有电势“L”的时段中,只有一个转移晶闸管T处于导通状态(例如,在图7中从时间点f到时间点i的时段内只有转移晶闸管T2处于导通状态)。 During a period in which either one of the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ2 has a potential “L”, only one transfer thyristor T is in the on state (for example, from time point f to time point i in FIG. 7 During the time period, only the transfer thyristor T2 is in the conduction state). the
当转移晶闸管T进入导通状态时,其栅极端子Gt的电势增加到“H”(0V),而连接到栅极端子Gm的存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压增大(-2.6V)。在只有一个转移晶闸管T处于导通状态的定时处(例如,图7中的时间点c、g和k),如果存储器信号φm的电势被设定在“L”(-3.3V),则具有增大的阈值电压的存储器晶闸管M接通。随后,栅极端子Gm的电势增大到“H”(0V)。同时,如果存储器信号φm的电势被设定在“H”和“L”之间的“S”(-2.5V),则具有增大的阈值电压的存储器晶闸管M没有接通。 When the transfer thyristor T enters the conduction state, the potential of its gate terminal Gt increases to "H" (0V), and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M connected to the gate terminal Gm increases (-2.6V). At the timing when only one transfer thyristor T is in the on state (for example, time points c, g, and k in FIG. 7), if the potential of the memory signal φm is set at “L” (−3.3 V), there is The increased threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M turns on. Subsequently, the potential of the gate terminal Gm increases to "H" (0 V). Meanwhile, if the potential of the memory signal φm is set at “S” (−2.5V) between “H” and “L”, the memory thyristor M having an increased threshold voltage is not turned on. the
其后,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M关断。由此,接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。然而,在栅极端子Gm的电势小于预定电势(-1.2V)之前,使得存储器信号φm的电势再次变成“L”(-3.3V)或“S”(-2.5V),由此使得接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M再次接通(例如时间点g、k和m)。 Thereafter, the memory thyristor M that has been turned on is turned off. Thereby, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M which is turned off after being turned on changes from "H" (0 V) to "L" (−3.3 V). However, before the potential of the gate terminal Gm is lower than the predetermined potential (-1.2V), the potential of the memory signal φm is made to become "L" (-3.3V) or "S" (-2.5V) again, thereby making the connection The memory thyristor M which was switched off after being switched on is switched on again (for example at times g, k and m). the
如上所述,在只有一个转移晶闸管T处于导通状态的定时,在根据图像数据集使得发光晶闸管L点亮的情况下(例如,在图像数据集“1”的情况下),存储器信号φm的电势变成“L”(-3.3V),而在不使得发光晶闸管L点亮的情况下(例如,在图像数据集“0”的情况下),存储器信号φm的电势变成“S”(-2.5V)。因此,仅仅使得具有与对应于图像数据集“1”(引起点亮)的发光晶闸管L相同编号的存储器晶闸管M接通。 As described above, at the timing when only one transfer thyristor T is in the on state, in the case where the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on according to the image data set (for example, in the case of the image data set "1"), the memory signal φm The potential becomes "L" (-3.3 V), while the potential of the memory signal φm becomes "S" ( -2.5V). Therefore, only the memory thyristor M having the same number as the light-emitting thyristor L corresponding to the image data set "1" (causing lighting up) is turned on. the
如果已经接通的存储器晶闸管M关断,则它再次接通。因此,引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)被存储。此时,引起点亮的 发光晶闸管L的数量可以是多个。在对应于预定位数的写入时段T(M)结束的时间点(在第一示例性实施例中的时间点r)处,与引起点亮的发光晶闸管L对应的所有存储器晶闸管M接通。 If the already switched-on memory thyristor M is switched off, it is switched on again. Accordingly, the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused lighting is stored. At this time, the number of light-emitting thyristors L to be turned on may be plural. At the time point (time point r in the first exemplary embodiment) at which the writing period T(M) corresponding to the predetermined number of digits ends, all the memory thyristors M corresponding to the light-emitting thyristor L causing lighting are turned on. . the
当存储器晶闸管M处于导通状态时,具有与存储器晶闸管M相同编号的发光晶闸管L的阈值电压增大(到-1.3V)。因此,通过把点亮信号φI的电势从“H”变成“Le”,使得具有与处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M相同编号的发光晶闸管L接通并点亮(发光)。 When the memory thyristor M is in the ON state, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L having the same number as the memory thyristor M increases (to -1.3V). Therefore, by changing the potential of the lighting signal φI from "H" to "Le", the light-emitting thyristor L having the same number as the memory thyristor M in the on state is turned on and lit (emits light). the
换言之,存储器晶闸管M具有这样的功能(锁存功能):把根据图像数据集使得发光晶闸管L点亮的位置(编号)进行存储。 In other words, the memory thyristor M has a function (latch function) of storing the position (number) at which the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on according to the image data set. the
存储器信号φm的电势“L”作为用于把根据图像数据集而点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)进行存储的信号,存储器信号φm的电势“S”作为使得接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M再次接通的信号(更新信号)。然而,电势“S”不会使得其它存储器晶闸管M接通。换言之,存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息被保持直到发光晶闸管L接通并点亮(发光)为止。 The potential "L" of the memory signal φm is used as a signal for storing the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that is lit according to the image data set, and the potential "S" of the memory signal φm is used as a memory that turns on and then turns off. Signal to turn on the thyristor M again (refresh signal). However, the potential "S" does not cause the other memory thyristors M to turn on. In other words, the stored information that the memory thyristor M has turned on is held until the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on and lights up (emits light). the
注意,当发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)时,存储器晶闸管M不必再存储将要点亮的发光存储器L的位置(编号)。为了对存储器晶闸管M的存储信息(接通存储器晶闸管L的历史)进行复位,仅需要使得存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压变低(<-3.3V),即,使得栅极端子Gm的电势变低(<-2V),从而即使存储器信号φm的电势变成“L”(-3.3V),也能防止接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M再次接通。如上所述,栅极端子Gm的电势根据由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm所定义的时间常数而改变。因此,例如,在把存储器信号φm的电势设定在“H”之后到再次设定在“L”的复位时段t5(从图7中的时间点u到时间点y)可以被设定长些,使得栅极端子Gm的电势变得更低。 Note that when the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on (emits light), the memory thyristor M does not need to store the position (number) of the light-emitting memory L to be turned on any more. In order to reset the stored information of the memory thyristor M (the history of turning on the memory thyristor L), it is only necessary to make the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M low (<−3.3 V), that is, to make the potential of the gate terminal Gm low ( <-2V), thereby preventing the memory thyristor M, which was turned off after being turned on, from being turned on again even if the potential of the memory signal φm becomes "L" (-3.3V). As described above, the potential of the gate terminal Gm changes according to the time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm. Therefore, for example, the reset period t5 (from the time point u to the time point y in FIG. 7 ) after setting the potential of the memory signal φm at "H" to "L" again can be set longer , so that the potential of the gate terminal Gm becomes lower. the
第一示例性实施例中的驱动方法是所谓的动态驱动。在存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势(电荷)不低于阈值电压时,重复更新。借此操作,继续存储已经接通的存储器晶闸管M。 The driving method in the first exemplary embodiment is so-called dynamic driving. Refreshing is repeated while the potential (charge) of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M is not lower than the threshold voltage. By this operation, the memory thyristor M that has been turned on continues to be stored. the
注意,由于如上所述,没有接通的存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压 保持在-3.9V或-4.6V,所以这些存储器晶闸管M保持在关断状态。 Note that since the threshold voltage of the memory thyristors M which are not turned on remains at -3.9V or -4.6V as described above, these memory thyristors M remain in the off state. the
存储器晶闸管M的阴极端子通过各个电阻Rn连接到提供有存储器信号φm的存储器信号线74。尽管处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M的阴极端子具有通过从阳极端子(0V)中减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)得到的电势,但是通过使用电阻Rn可以把存储器信号线74保持在存储器信号φm的电势。因此,可以使得多个存储器晶闸管M同时进入导通状态。 The cathode terminals of the memory thyristors M are connected through respective resistors Rn to a
注意,在图4的电路中,点亮信号φI可以由电流驱动。另外,为了抑制发光点(发光晶闸管L)的发光量的变化,可以使得将要提供的电流值根据同时引起点亮的发光点(发光晶闸管L)的数量而改变。在以上描述中,描述了由电流驱动来提供点亮信号φI,当在一个发光时段t4使得多个发光晶闸管L点亮时,提供对应于发光晶闸管L的数量的电流。 Note that in the circuit of FIG. 4, the lighting signal φI can be driven by a current. In addition, in order to suppress variation in the amount of light emitted from the light-emitting points (light-emitting thyristors L), the current value to be supplied may be made to vary according to the number of light-emitting points (light-emitting thyristors L) that simultaneously cause lighting. In the above description, it is described that the lighting signal φI is supplied by current driving, and when a plurality of light-emitting thyristors L are turned on for one light-emitting period t4, a current corresponding to the number of light-emitting thyristors L is supplied. the
相反,当以预定电压驱动(电压驱动)点亮信号φI时,流入点亮(发光)的发光晶闸管L中的电流变得恒定。在此情况下,为了在一个发光时段使得多个发光晶闸管L点亮,仅需要在点亮信号线75与发光晶闸管L的每个阴极端子之间设置电阻,如同在存储器信号线74与每个存储器晶闸管M之间设置电阻Rn一样。如果不是这种情况,使得点亮信号线75的电势变成电势(-1.3V),该电势是通过从处于导通状态的一个发光晶闸管L的阳极端子的电势中减去扩散电势Vd而得到的,因此,其它发光晶闸管L不再接通,并且没有点亮。 In contrast, when the lighting signal φI is driven (voltage driven) at a predetermined voltage, the current flowing in the light-emitting thyristor L that lights up (lights up) becomes constant. In this case, in order to light up a plurality of light-emitting thyristors L in one light-emitting period, it is only necessary to provide a resistor between the
如果用电流驱动点亮信号φI,则不在点亮信号线75与发光晶闸管L的每个阴极端子之间设置电阻是可接受的。在此情况下,使用电源电势V、扩散电势Vd和外部电阻R,把流入发光芯片C中的电流定义为I=(V-Vd)/R。因此,流入到在一个发光时段t4同时点亮(发光)的多个发光晶闸管L中的每一个中的电流具有通过用l除以点亮(发光)的发光晶闸管L的数量而得到的值。因而,根据在一个发光时段同时点亮(发光)的发光晶闸管L的数量的不同,流入每个发光晶闸管L中的电流是不同的,因此,每个发光晶闸管L的光强度不同。 为了避免这样,待提供的电流值可以根据引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的数量而改变。 If the lighting signal φI is driven with a current, it is acceptable not to provide a resistance between the
通过使用提供给发光芯片C的图像数据集得到在一个发光时段t4同时引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的数量,因此可以根据同时点亮的发光晶闸管L的数量来设定电流值。 The number of light-emitting thyristors L simultaneously caused to be turned on in one light-emitting period t4 is obtained by using the image data set provided to the light-emitting chip C, and thus the current value can be set according to the number of light-emitting thyristors L simultaneously turned on. the
利用图7描述流入存储器晶闸管M的电流。注意,这里描述了从时间点c到时间点y的点亮控制时段T(#A)。 The current flowing into the memory thyristor M will be described using FIG. 7 . Note that the lighting control period T(#A) from time point c to time point y is described here. the
如上所述,通过在时间点c把存储器信号φm的电势从“H”变成“L”,使得存储器晶闸管M1接通。随后,在时间点d处,通过把存储器信号φm的电势从“L”变成“H”,使得存储器晶闸管M1关断。换言之,在存储器信号φm的电势为“L”的从时间点c到时间点d的时段t2内,存储器晶闸管M1进入导通状态,并且导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M1中。存储器晶闸管M1在时间点g处再次接通,并且在时间点h处关断。同样在这一时段内,导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M1中。在从时间点k到时间点l的时段内重复相同的操作。通过在时间点m处把存储器信号φm的电势从“H”变成“S”,使得存储器晶闸管M1接通,并且随后通过在时间点n处把存储器信号φm的电势从“S”变成“H”,使得存储器晶闸管M1关断。在这一时段内,小于导通电流Jo的保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管M1中,这是因为存储器晶闸管M1的阴极端子的电势为“S”的缘故。类似地,在从各个时间点o、p、q和r开始的时段t2期间,导通电流Jo、保持电流Js、保持电流Js和导通电流Jo分别流入到存储器晶闸管M1中。因此,从时间点c到时间点s的时段包括导通电流Jo流入存储器晶闸管M1的5个时段、以及保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M1的3个时段。 As described above, by changing the potential of the memory signal φm from "H" to "L" at the time point c, the memory thyristor M1 is turned on. Subsequently, at a time point d, the memory thyristor M1 is turned off by changing the potential of the memory signal φm from “L” to “H”. In other words, during the period t2 from time point c to time point d when the potential of the memory signal φm is “L”, the memory thyristor M1 enters the conduction state, and conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M1 . The memory thyristor M1 is switched on again at the point in time g and switched off at the point in time h. Also during this period, the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M1. The same operation is repeated during the period from time point k to
类似地,对于存储器晶闸管M2来说,从时间点c到时间点s的时段包括导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M2的4个时段、以及保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M2的3个时段。 Similarly, for the memory thyristor M2, the period from the time point c to the time point s includes 4 periods during which the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M2 and 3 periods during which the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristor M2. the
类似地,对于存储器晶闸管M3来说,从时间点c到时间点s的时段包括导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M3的3个时段、以及保持 电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M3的3个时段。 Similarly, for the memory thyristor M3, the period from the time point c to the time point s includes 3 periods during which the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M3 and 3 periods during which the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristor M3. the
类似地,对于存储器晶闸管M5来说,从时间点c到时间点s的时段包括导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M5的2个时段、以及保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M5的2个时段。 Similarly, for the memory thyristor M5, the period from the time point c to the time point s includes 2 periods during which the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M5 and 2 periods during which the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristor M5. the
对于存储器晶闸管M8来说,从时间点c到时间点s的时段包括导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M8的1个时段。 For the memory thyristor M8, the period from the time point c to the time point s includes 1 period in which the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M8. the
另一方面,对于存储器晶闸管M4、M6和M7来说,在从时间点c到时间点s的时段内,既没有导通电流Jo也没有保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管。 On the other hand, for the memory thyristors M4, M6, and M7, neither the conduction current Jo nor the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristors during the period from the time point c to the time point s. the
因此,对于存储器晶闸管M1到M8来说,具有导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管的15个时段、以及保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管的11个时段。 Therefore, for the memory thyristors M1 to M8, there are 15 periods in which the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristors, and 11 periods in which the sustain current Js flows into the memory thyristors. the
注意,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中,忽略了保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管中的从时间点s到时间点u的时段。 Note that in the lighting control period T(#A), the period from the time point s to the time point u in which the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristor is ignored. the
假定“L”被设定在-3.3V,“S”被设定在-2.5V,时段t1(与写入时段T(M1)相同)被设定在100纳秒,时段t2被设定在10纳秒。另外,连接到存储器晶闸管M的每个阴极端子的电阻Rn被设定成1kΩ。处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M的阴极端子的电势为-1.3V,该电势是通过从阳极端子的电势(“H”(0V))中减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。 Assume that "L" is set at -3.3V, "S" is set at -2.5V, period t1 (same as writing period T(M1)) is set at 100 ns, and period t2 is set at 10 nanoseconds. In addition, the resistance Rn connected to each cathode terminal of the memory thyristor M was set to 1 kΩ. The potential of the cathode terminal of the memory thyristor M in the ON state is -1.3V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) from the potential of the anode terminal ("H" (0V)). the
因此,在导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M的时段内,-2V(=(-3.3V)-(-1.3V))的电压被施加在电阻Rn的两端。因此,导通电流Jo变成2mA(=2V/1kΩ)。 Therefore, a voltage of -2V (=(-3.3V)-(-1.3V)) is applied across the resistance Rn during the period in which the on-current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M. Therefore, the on-current Jo becomes 2mA (=2V/1kΩ). the
同时,在保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M的时段内,-1.2V(=(-2.5V)-(-1.3V))被施加在电阻Rn的两端。因此,保持电流Js变成1.2mA(=1.2V/1kΩ)。 At the same time, -1.2V (=(-2.5V)-(-1.3V)) is applied across the resistance Rn during the period in which the sustain current Js flows into the memory thyristor M. Therefore, the holding current Js becomes 1.2 mA (=1.2 V/1 kΩ). the
因此,在从时间点c到时间点s的时段中由存储器晶闸管M和电阻Rn消耗的能量被计算得到1.32纳焦耳(=15倍×10纳秒×2mA×3.3V+11倍×10纳秒×1.2mA×2.5V)。 Therefore, the energy consumed by the memory thyristor M and the resistor Rn in the period from time point c to time point s is calculated to be 1.32 nanojoules (=15 times×10 nanoseconds×2mA×3.3V+11 times×10 nanoseconds ×1.2mA×2.5V). the
从时间点c到时间点s的时段为710纳秒。如果发光占空比(发 光时段t4与点亮控制时段T(#A)的比率)被设定为50%,则点亮控制时段T(#A)被设定为1420纳秒。 The period from time point c to time point s is 710 nanoseconds. If the lighting duty (the ratio of the lighting period t4 to the lighting control period T(#A)) is set to 50%, the lighting control period T(#A) is set to 1420 nanoseconds. the
因此,在从时间点c到时间点y的上述时段内由存储器晶闸管M和电阻Rn所消耗的能量是0.93mW的平均功耗。 Therefore, the energy consumed by the memory thyristor M and the resistance Rn during the above period from the time point c to the time point y is an average power consumption of 0.93 mW. the
返回到发光部分63,进一步考虑其操作。如上所述,发光部分63的发光芯片C2到C60与发光芯片C1如上所述并行操作。在对发光芯片C1的发光晶闸管L1到L8进行点亮控制的点亮控制时段T(#A)中,对其它发光芯片C2到C60中每一个的发光晶闸管L1到L8并行进行发光控制。 Returning to the
类似地,在对发光芯片C1的发光晶闸管L9到L16进行点亮控制的点亮控制时段T(#B)中,对发光部分63的其它发光芯片C2到C60中每一个的发光晶闸管L9到L16并行进行发光控制。在其它点亮控制时段T(#C)中,执行相同的点亮控制。 Similarly, in the lighting control period T(#B) in which lighting control is performed on the light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 of the light-emitting chip C1, the light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 of each of the other light-emitting chips C2 to C60 of the light-emitting
点亮信号φI的电势被设定在“Le”的时段(从图7中的时间点t到时间点x)确定了发光晶闸管L的发光时段t4。在第一示例性实施例中,为发光芯片C中的对应两个提供点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)中的每一个。因此,在被提供了一个点亮信号φI的发光芯片C(例如,提供图4中的点亮信号φI1的发光芯片C1和C2)中,其发光时段t4彼此相等。然而,由于可以为各个组(例如,为组#A和#B)设置不同的发光时段t4,所以可以针对发光芯片C的各个组校正光强度的变化。 The period during which the potential of the lighting signal φI is set at “Le” (from the time point t to the time point x in FIG. 7 ) determines the light emission period t4 of the light-emitting thyristor L. In the first exemplary embodiment, each of the lighting signals φI (φI1 to φI30 ) is supplied to corresponding two of the light-emitting chips C. Therefore, in the light-emitting chip C supplied with one lighting signal φI (for example, the light-emitting chips C1 and C2 supplied with the lighting signal φI1 in FIG. 4 ), the light-emitting periods t4 thereof are equal to each other. However, since a different light-emitting period t4 can be set for each group (for example, for groups #A and #B), variations in light intensity can be corrected for each group of light-emitting chips C. the
可选地,可以通过为各个点亮信号φI设置发光时段t4来校正发光芯片C之间的光强度的变化。 Alternatively, variations in light intensity between light-emitting chips C may be corrected by setting the light-emitting period t4 for each lighting signal φI. the
注意,已经描述了在点亮控制时段T(#A)使得发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8点亮(发光)以及使得发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7不被点亮(熄灭)。如上所述,当使得发光晶闸管L点亮时,仅需要将存储器信号φm的电势设定在“L”。同时,当不使得发光晶闸管L点亮时,仅需要把存储器信号φm的电势设定在“S”。由于为图4所示的各个发光芯片C提供了存储器信号φm,所以可以根据图像数据集来控制是否引起发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)。 Note that it has been described that the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 are turned on (lighted) and the light-emitting thyristors L4 , L6 , and L7 are not turned on (turned off) in the lighting control period T(#A). As described above, when causing the light-emitting thyristor L to light, it is only necessary to set the potential of the memory signal φm at "L". Meanwhile, when the light-emitting thyristor L is not caused to light, it is only necessary to set the potential of the memory signal φm at "S". Since the memory signal φm is supplied to each light-emitting chip C shown in FIG. 4, it is possible to control whether to cause the light-emitting thyristor L to light up (emit light) according to the image data set. the
图8是说明在没有应用第一示例性实施例情况下的发光芯片C1(C)操作的时序图。除了以下说明,该操作与图7所示应用了第一示例性实施例的情况相同。换言之,发光装置65中的信号生成电路100的结构以及信号生成电路100与每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)之间的布线结构同图4所示的结构相同。另外,发光芯片C的电路结构与图5所示的结构相同。在点亮控制时段T(#A)中,假定打印图像数据集“11101001”。 FIG. 8 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light emitting chip C1 (C) in the case where the first exemplary embodiment is not applied. Except for the following description, the operation is the same as the case shown in FIG. 7 to which the first exemplary embodiment is applied. In other words, the structure of the
图8与第一示例性实施例的情况(图7)之间的不同之处在于:存储器信号φm1(φm)在从时间点c到时间点r的时段中的波形。这里的驱动方法不是动态驱动而是静态驱动。 The difference between FIG. 8 and the case of the first exemplary embodiment ( FIG. 7 ) is the waveform of the memory signal φm1 (φm) in the period from time point c to time point r. The driving method here is not dynamic driving but static driving. the
在应用了第一示例性实施例的情况下(图7),通过在存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势小于预定值之前使得存储器信号φm的电势设定在“L”或“S”从而使得接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M接通,防止存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息丢失。 In the case where the first exemplary embodiment is applied (FIG. 7), by setting the potential of the memory signal φm at "L" or "S" before the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M becomes smaller than a predetermined value, The memory thyristor M that was turned off after being turned on is turned on, so as to prevent the loss of the stored information that the memory thyristor M has been turned on. the
另一方面,在没有应用第一示例性实施例的情况下,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M没有关断,并且保持在导通状态。 On the other hand, in the case where the first exemplary embodiment is not applied, the memory thyristor M that has been turned on is not turned off, and remains in the on state. the
将描述存储器信号φm1的波形。 The waveform of the memory signal φm1 will be described. the
存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在写入时段T(M1)的开始时间点c从“H”变成“L”,并且在时间点d从“L”变成“S”。随后,其电势保持在“S”直到作为写入时段T(M1)的结束时间点的时间点g为止。在同样作为写入时段T(M2)的开始时间点的时间点g处,其电势从“S”变成“L”,并且随后在时间点h处从“L”变成“S”。其电势保持在“S”直到作为写入时段T(M2)的结束时间点的时间点k为止。即,写入时段T(M2)中的波形重复写入时段T(M1)中的波形。随后,同样在随后的写入时段T(M3),重复相同的波形。 The potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “L” at the start time point c of the writing period T( M1 ), and changes from “L” to “S” at the time point d. Subsequently, its potential is maintained at "S" until a time point g which is an end time point of the writing period T( M1 ). Its potential changes from "S" to "L" at a time point g also as a start time point of the writing period T( M2 ), and then changes from "L" to "S" at a time point h. Its potential is kept at "S" until time point k which is the end time point of the writing period T( M2 ). That is, the waveform in the writing period T(M2) repeats the waveform in the writing period T(M1). Then, also in the subsequent writing period T(M3), the same waveform is repeated. the
然而,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势保持在“S”直到作为写入时段T(M4)的开始时间点的时间点m,并且在作为写入时段T(M5)的开始时间点的时间点o处从“S”变成“L”。写入时段T(M5)中的存储器信号φm1的波形重复写入时段T(M1)中的波形。写入时段T(M6)和T(M7)中的存储器信号φm1(φm)的波形重复写入时段T(M4)中 的波形。另外,在本示例性实施例中,写入时段T(M8)中的存储器信号φm1(φm)的波形与第一示例性实施例中的写入时段T(M8)中的波形相同。 However, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is kept at “S” until the time point m which is the start time point of the write period T(M4), and at the time point which is the start time point of the write period T(M5) o from "S" to "L". The waveform of the memory signal φm1 in the writing period T( M5 ) repeats the waveform in the writing period T( M1 ). The waveform of the memory signal φm1 (φm) in the writing periods T(M6) and T(M7) repeats the waveform in the writing period T(M4). In addition, in the present exemplary embodiment, the waveform of the memory signal φm1 (φm) in the writing period T( M8 ) is the same as that in the writing period T( M8 ) in the first exemplary embodiment. the
接下来,将描述存储器晶闸管M的操作。 Next, the operation of the memory thyristor M will be described. the
紧接着图8中的时间点b之后,转移晶闸管T1处于导通状态,存储器晶闸管M1的阈值电压为-2.6V。当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点c处从“H”(0V)变成到“L”(-3.3V)时,阈值电压为-2.6V的存储器晶闸管M1接通。 Immediately after time point b in FIG. 8 , the transfer thyristor T1 is in a conducting state, and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M1 is -2.6V. When the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” (0V) to “L” (−3.3V) at time point c, the memory thyristor M1 with a threshold voltage of −2.6V is turned on. the
随后,在时间点d处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“L”变成“S”。处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M1的阴极端子的电势为-1.3V,该电势是通过从阳极端子的电势(“H”(0V))中减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的。因此,使用-2.5V的“S”来保持存储器晶闸管M1的导通状态。换言之,在时间点d处,存储器晶闸管M1没有关断,而是保持在导通状态。 Subsequently, at a time point d, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” to “S”. The potential of the cathode terminal of the memory thyristor M1 in the on state is -1.3V, which is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) from the potential of the anode terminal ("H" (0V)). Therefore, "S" of -2.5V is used to maintain the on state of the memory thyristor M1. In other words, at time point d, the memory thyristor M1 is not turned off, but remains in the on state. the
因此,如在电流J(M1)中所示,从时间点c到时间点d,导通电流Jo流入存储器晶闸管M1,从时间点d到时间点f,保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管M1中。 Therefore, as shown in the current J(M1), the ON current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M1 from the time point c to the time point d, and the holding current Js flows into the memory thyristor M1 from the time point d to the time point f. the
类似地,当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点g处从“S”(-2.5V)变成“L”(-3.3V)时,存储器晶闸管M2接通。同时,由于存储器晶闸管M1保持在导通状态,流入到存储器晶闸管M1中的电流从保持电流Js变成导通电流Jo。从时间点g到时间点h,导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M1中,从时间点h到时间点k,保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管M1。同时,如在电流J(M2)中所示,从时间点g到时间点h,导通电流Jo流入到存储器晶闸管M2,从时间点h到时间点k,保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管M2。 Similarly, when the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” (−2.5V) to “L” (−3.3V) at the time point g, the memory thyristor M2 is turned on. At the same time, since the memory thyristor M1 is kept in the on state, the current flowing into the memory thyristor M1 changes from the holding current Js to the turning-on current Jo. From the time point g to the time point h, the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M1, and from the time point h to the time point k, the sustain current Js flows into the memory thyristor M1. Meanwhile, as shown in the current J(M2), the ON current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M2 from the time point g to the time point h, and the sustain current Js flows into the memory thyristor M2 from the time point h to the time point k. the
写入时段T(M3)重复写入时段T(M1),并且存储器晶闸管M3重新接通。在写入时段T(M3)的结束时间点m处,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3保持在导通状态。 The writing period T(M3) repeats the writing period T(M1), and the memory thyristor M3 is turned on again. At the end time point m of the writing period T( M3 ), the memory thyristors M1 , M2 and M3 are kept in the on state. the
在写入时段T(M4)的开始时间点m处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势保持在“S”。因此,在写入时段T(M3)中,阈值电压为-2.6V 的存储器晶闸管M4没有接通。因此,在时间点m处,存储器晶闸管M1、M2和M3保持在导通状态。 At the start time point m of the writing period T( M4 ), the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is kept at “S”. Therefore, in the writing period T(M3), the memory thyristor M4 whose threshold voltage is -2.6V is not turned on. Therefore, at the time point m, the memory thyristors M1, M2, and M3 are kept in the on state. the
在写入时段T(M5)中,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“S”变成“L”,所以存储器晶闸管M5接通。然而,在写入时段T(M6)和T(M7)中,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势保持在“S”,所以存储器晶闸管M6和M7没有接通。其后,在写入时段T(M8)的开始时间点r处,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“S”变成“L”,所以存储器晶闸管M8接通。 In the writing period T( M5 ), since the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” to “L”, the memory thyristor M5 is turned on. However, in the writing periods T( M6 ) and T( M7 ), since the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) remains at “S”, the memory thyristors M6 and M7 are not turned on. Thereafter, at the start time point r of the writing period T( M8 ), since the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” to “L”, the memory thyristor M8 is turned on. the
尽管省略了其具体描述,但是如在写入时段T(M3)到T(M7)中的电流J(M1)到J(M8)所示,电流流入到存储器晶闸管M1到M8。 Although a detailed description thereof is omitted, current flows into the memory thyristors M1 to M8 as shown by currents J(M1) to J(M8) in the writing periods T(M3) to T(M7). the
从时间点r到时间点y的操作与应用了第一示例性实施例的情况下(图7)已经描述的操作相同。换言之,当点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势在时间点t从“H”变成“Le”时,具有与处于导通状态的各个存储器晶闸管M相同编号的各个发光晶闸管L(这里,为发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8)接通并且点亮(发光)。 The operations from time point r to time point y are the same as those already described in the case ( FIG. 7 ) to which the first exemplary embodiment is applied. In other words, when the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “H” to “Le” at the time point t, each light-emitting thyristor L (here, light emitting thyristor L) having the same number as each memory thyristor M in the on state Thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 and L8 ) are turned on and lighted (emit light). the
如上所述,在没有应用第一示例性实施例的情况下,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M保持在导通状态,其栅极端子Gm的电势保持在“H”(0V)。因此,与第一示例性实施例不同的是,不必在栅极端子Gm的电势变成预定电势之前把存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“L”变成“S”。换言之,在图8中,从时间点d到时间点g的时段t3的长度不受限制。 As described above, in the case where the first exemplary embodiment is not applied, the memory thyristor M that has been turned on remains in the on state, and the potential of the gate terminal Gm thereof is kept at "H" (0 V). Therefore, unlike the first exemplary embodiment, it is not necessary to change the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “L” to “S” before the potential of the gate terminal Gm becomes a predetermined potential. In other words, in FIG. 8, the length of the period t3 from the time point d to the time point g is not limited. the
然而,在没有应用第一示例性实施例的情况下(图8),存储器晶闸管M的功耗增大。例如,在写入时段T(M1)中从时间点d到时间点g的时段中,保持电流Js流入到存储器晶闸管M中。保持电流Js流入存储器晶闸管M的时段有21个。因此,在从时间点c到时间点s的时段内由存储器晶闸管M和电阻Rn所消耗的能量具有这样的值(6.99纳焦耳):该值是通过把5.67纳焦耳(=21倍×90纳秒×1.2mA×2.5V)添加到图7所述的值1.32纳焦耳而得到的。因此,通过用该值除以从时间点c到时间点y的时段的1420纳秒得到平均功耗为4.92mW。 However, in the case where the first exemplary embodiment is not applied ( FIG. 8 ), the power consumption of the memory thyristor M increases. For example, the sustain current Js flows into the memory thyristor M in the period from the time point d to the time point g in the writing period T( M1 ). There are 21 periods during which the sustain current Js flows into the memory thyristor M. Therefore, the energy consumed by the memory thyristor M and the resistance Rn in the period from the time point c to the time point s has a value (6.99 nanojoules) which is obtained by multiplying 5.67 nanojoules (=21 times×90 nanojoules seconds x 1.2 mA x 2.5 V) to the value of 1.32 nJ as described in Figure 7. Therefore, dividing this value by 1420 nanoseconds for the period from time point c to time point y yields an average power consumption of 4.92 mW. the
因此,在图7所述第一示例性实施例中的平均功耗(0.93mW)是图8所示没有应用第一示例性实施例情况下的平均功耗(4.92mW)的五分之一。 Therefore, the average power consumption (0.93mW) in the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 7 is one-fifth of the average power consumption (4.92mW) shown in FIG. 8 without applying the first exemplary embodiment . the
假定在发光晶闸管L点亮(发光)的情况下的电流为10mA。在这种状态下,在如图7和图8所示5个发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8点亮的情况下的电流变成50mA。还假定从图7和图8中的时间点t到时间点x的发光时段t4的发光占空比为50%,施加到发光晶闸管L的电势为-2V。在这种状态下,处于导通状态的5个发光晶闸管L的功耗变成50mW(=0.5×5个发光晶闸管×10mA×2V)。 Assume that the current in the case where the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on (emits light) is 10 mA. In this state, the current in the case where five light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are lit as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 becomes 50 mA. Also assuming that the light emission duty ratio of the light emission period t4 from the time point t to the time point x in FIGS. 7 and 8 is 50%, the potential applied to the light emitting thyristor L is -2V. In this state, the power consumption of the five light-emitting thyristors L in the on state becomes 50 mW (=0.5×5 light-emitting thyristors×10 mA×2 V). the
没有应用第一示例性实施例情况下的存储器晶闸管M中的功耗为发光晶闸管L的功耗的10%。 The power consumption in the memory thyristor M without applying the first exemplary embodiment is 10% of the power consumption in the light emitting thyristor L. the
因此,在第一示例性实施例中,由于可以减小存储器晶闸管M的功耗,所以可以抑制发光芯片C的功耗。 Therefore, in the first exemplary embodiment, since the power consumption of the memory thyristor M can be reduced, the power consumption of the light emitting chip C can be suppressed. the
注意,上述功耗仅仅是一个实例,功耗根据点亮的发光晶闸管L的数量和发光占空比而变化。 Note that the above-mentioned power consumption is only an example, and the power consumption varies depending on the number of light-emitting thyristors L lit and the light-emitting duty ratio. the
接下来,将描述在第一示例性实施例中存储器晶闸管M关断之后存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势变化。 Next, the potential change of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M after the memory thyristor M is turned off in the first exemplary embodiment will be described. the
图9是示出了存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压与存储器晶闸管M关断之后栅极端子Gm的电势的变化的一个实例的曲线图。横轴表示存储器晶闸管M关断之后的时间(纳秒),而纵轴表示栅极端子Gm的电势(V)和存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压(V)。尽管,在上面的描述中,处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势假定为0V,然而,这里设定为真实值-0.2V(存储器晶闸管M关断之后0纳秒处的栅极端子的电势)。 FIG. 9 is a graph showing one example of a change in the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M and the potential of the gate terminal Gm after the memory thyristor M is turned off. The horizontal axis represents the time (nanoseconds) after the memory thyristor M is turned off, and the vertical axis represents the potential (V) of the gate terminal Gm and the threshold voltage (V) of the memory thyristor M. Although, in the above description, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M in the on-state is assumed to be 0V, however, here it is set to a real value -0.2V (the potential at 0 nanoseconds after the memory thyristor M is turned off). potential at the gate terminal). the
这里,假定栅极端子Gm的寄生电容为25pF,电源线电阻Rm为20kΩ。因此,存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势随着时间常数500纳秒(=25pF×20kΩ)而减小。 Here, it is assumed that the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm is 25 pF, and the power supply line resistance Rm is 20 kΩ. Therefore, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M decreases with a time constant of 500 nanoseconds (=25 pF×20 kΩ). the
响应于存储器晶闸管M关断之后所经过的时间,存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势从-0.2V减小到电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压的值通过从栅极端子Gm的电势中减去扩散电 势Vd(1.3V)而得到,并且由此从-1.5V减小到-4.6V。 In response to the time elapsed after the memory thyristor M is turned off, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M decreases from -0.2V to the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V). The value of the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M is obtained by subtracting the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) from the potential of the gate terminal Gm, and thereby decreases from -1.5V to -4.6V. the
在存储器晶闸管M关断之后的200nm时,栅极端子Gm的电势减小到-1.2V,即,参考图9,存储器晶闸管M的阈值电压减小到-2.5V。 At 200 nm after the memory thyristor M is turned off, the potential of the gate terminal Gm decreases to -1.2V, that is, referring to FIG. 9 , the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M decreases to -2.5V. the
因此,在图7所示的第一示例性实施例中,仅需要把时段t3(例如,图7中从时间点d到时间点g的时段、从时间点l到时间点m的时段,等等)设定在200nm内从而使得接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管再次接通。如果时段t3超过200纳秒,由于阈值电压小于-2.5V,所以存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势“S”(-2.5V)不再使得存储器晶闸管M接通,并且存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息从存储器晶闸管M中丢失。 Therefore, in the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 7, only the period t3 (for example, the period from time point d to time point g in FIG. 7, the period from time point l to time point m, etc. etc.) are set within 200 nm such that a memory thyristor that was turned off after being turned on is turned on again. If the period t3 exceeds 200 nanoseconds, since the threshold voltage is less than -2.5V, the potential "S" (-2.5V) of the memory signal φm1 (φm) no longer causes the memory thyristor M to be turned on, and the memory thyristor M is already turned on. The stored information is lost from the memory thyristor M. the
注意,图9中所示的值是一个实例,时段t3的允许长度根据存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm的值而变化。例如,如果使得电源线电阻Rm变大,则时间常数变大,由此栅极端子Gm的电势减小到-1.2V的时间变成大于200纳秒。相反,如果使得电源线电阻Rm变小,则时间常数变小,由此栅极端子Gm的电势减小到-1.2V的时间变成小于200纳秒。类似地,栅极端子Gm的寄生电容使得长度发生变化。 Note that the values shown in FIG. 9 are an example, and the allowable length of the period t3 varies according to the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M and the value of the power supply line resistance Rm. For example, if the power supply line resistance Rm is made larger, the time constant becomes larger, whereby the time for the potential of the gate terminal Gm to decrease to -1.2V becomes longer than 200 nanoseconds. On the contrary, if the power supply line resistance Rm is made small, the time constant becomes small, whereby the time for the potential of the gate terminal Gm to decrease to -1.2V becomes less than 200 nanoseconds. Similarly, the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm causes the length to vary. the
因此,使用存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm的值可以调节时间常数。 Therefore, the time constant can be adjusted using the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M and the value of the power supply line resistance Rm. the
<第二示例性实施例> <Second Exemplary Embodiment>
图10是说明第二示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1(C)的操作的时序图。 FIG. 10 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) in the second exemplary embodiment. the
在第二示例性实施例中,发光装置65中的信号生成电路100的结构以及信号生成电路100与每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)之间的布线结构与图4所示的第一示例性实施例中的结构相同。发光芯片100的电路结构与图5中所示的第一示例性实施例中的结构相同。 In the second exemplary embodiment, the structure of the
在第一示例性实施例中,在接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势小于预定电势之前,提供用于写入图像数据集的下一位的信号“L”或“S”(存储器信号φm)。 In the first exemplary embodiment, the signal “L” or “ S" (memory signal φm). the
然而,如上所述,作为实例,在已经接通的存储器晶闸管M关 断之后直到存储器晶闸管M再次接通的时段t3为200纳秒。时段t3由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm所确定,并且由此时段t3的可变范围受到限制。 However, as described above, as an example, the period t3 until the memory thyristor M is turned on again after the memory thyristor M that has been turned on is turned off is 200 nanoseconds. The period t3 is determined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm, and thus the variable range of the period t3 is limited. the
在点亮控制时段T(#B)的开始时间点(图7和图10中的时间点y)中,应当针对点亮控制时段T(#A)在每个存储器晶闸管M中对存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息进行复位。为了对存储信息进行复位,要求栅极端子Gm的电势在从时间点u到时间点y的复位时段t5处小于-2V,在时间点u处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在点亮控制时段T(#A)中最后从“S”变成“H”,在时间点y处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在点亮控制时段T(#B)中首次从“H”变成“L”或者“S”。在图9所示的实例中,为了使得栅极端子Gm的电势小于-2V,在关断存储器晶闸管M之后需要不小于400纳秒。因此,在有些情况下,复位时段t5可能太长。 At the start time point (time point y in FIGS. 7 and 10 ) of the lighting control period T(#B), the memory thyristor M should be set in each memory thyristor M for the lighting control period T(#A). The stored information that has been turned on is reset. In order to reset the stored information, the potential of the gate terminal Gm is required to be less than -2V at the reset period t5 from the time point u to the time point y, at which the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is in the lighting control Changing from "S" to "H" last in the period T(#A), at time point y, the potential of the memory signal φm1(φm) changes from "H" to "H" for the first time in the lighting control period T(#B) "L" or "S". In the example shown in FIG. 9 , in order to make the potential of the gate terminal Gm smaller than −2 V, it takes not less than 400 nanoseconds after the memory thyristor M is turned off. Therefore, the reset period t5 may be too long in some cases. the
同时,如果通过调节存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm中的至少任何一个来将时间常数设定为较短,则时段t4可以更短。然而,时段t3也会更短。 Meanwhile, the period t4 may be shorter if the time constant is set shorter by adjusting at least any one of the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M and the power supply line resistance Rm. However, period t3 is also shorter. the
为了避免这种情况,在第二示例性实施例中,在把图像数据集写入存储器晶闸管M中的存储器信号φm的写入时段T(M)内,新添加存储器信号φm的电势变成“S”的时段,从而更新存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息。因此,时段t3可以设定成大于由时间常数所确定的时段,该时间常数由存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm来定义。 In order to avoid this, in the second exemplary embodiment, the potential of the newly added memory signal φm becomes “ S" period, thereby updating the stored information that the memory thyristor M has been turned on. Therefore, the period t3 can be set larger than the period determined by the time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M and the power supply line resistance Rm. the
在图10中,重新把存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势设定为“S”的时段被添加到第一示例性实施例中的图7中的写入时段T(M)中。换言之,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在写入时段T(M1)中的时间点d之后并且在时间点e之前的时间点α处从“H”变成“S”,并且在时间点α之后并且在时间点e之前的时间点β处从“S”变成“H”。 In FIG. 10 , a period for resetting the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) to “S” is added to the writing period T(M) in FIG. 7 in the first exemplary embodiment. In other words, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “S” at a time point α after the time point d and before the time point e in the writing period T(M1), and at the time point α After that and at a time point β before the time point e, it changes from "S" to "H". the
发光芯片C1(C)在时间点α处的操作与已经描述的第示例性实施例中图7中的时间点m处的操作相同。具体地说,如果在时间 点c处接通并且在时间点d处关断的存储器晶闸管M1的栅极端子Gm1的电势在时间点α处不小于-1.2V,则存储器晶闸管M1的阈值电压不小于-2.5V。因此,通过在时间点α处把存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”(0V)变成“S”(-2.5V),存储器晶闸管M1再次接通。类似地,如果栅极端子Gm1的电势不小于-1.2V,则在时间点β处已经关断的存储器晶闸管M1在时间点g处的阈值电压不小于-2.5V。因此,通过在时间点g把存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V),存储器晶闸管M1再次接通。 The operation of the light emitting chip C1(C) at the time point α is the same as the operation at the time point m in FIG. 7 in the already described first exemplary embodiment. Specifically, if the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 of the memory thyristor M1 turned on at the time point c and turned off at the time point d is not less than −1.2 V at the time point α, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M1 does not less than -2.5V. Therefore, by changing the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “H” (0 V) to “S” (−2.5 V) at the time point α, the memory thyristor M1 is turned on again. Similarly, if the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 is not less than -1.2V, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M1 which has been turned off at the time point β at the time point g is not less than -2.5V. Therefore, by changing the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “H” (0 V) to “L” (−3.3 V) at the time point g, the memory thyristor M1 is turned on again. the
在其它写入时段T(M2)到T(M7),情况也是如此。对于这些时段T(M2)到T(M7),将省略掉具体描述。注意,在写入时段T(M8)中,操作与第一示例性实施例中的操作相同。 The same is true for the other writing periods T(M2) to T(M7). For these periods T(M2) to T(M7), detailed description will be omitted. Note that in the writing period T( M8 ), the operation is the same as that in the first exemplary embodiment. the
如上所述,在第二示例性实施例中,在写入时段T(M)中间(例如,在写入时段T(M1)中从时间点α到时间点β的时段),设置了存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势被设定在“S”的时段。这是因为如上所述,更新了存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息。注意,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势被设定在“S”而不是“L”,从而防止新的存储器晶闸管M接通。 As described above, in the second exemplary embodiment, in the middle of the writing period T(M) (for example, the period from the time point α to the time point β in the writing period T(M1)), the memory signal is set The potential of φm1 (φm) is set for a period of “S”. This is because the stored information that the memory thyristor M has been turned on is updated as described above. Note that the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is set at “S” instead of “L”, thereby preventing new memory thyristors M from being turned on. the
另外,在第二示例性实施例中,尽管在写入时段T(M)的中间设置了把电势设定在“S”从而更新存储器的一个时段,但是可以在写入时段T(M)中设置多个时段。仅需要设置把电势设定在“S”用于更新的时段,从而使得接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M再次接通。因此,可以单独设定时段t3的长度和复位时段t5。 In addition, in the second exemplary embodiment, although a period in which the potential is set at "S" to update the memory is provided in the middle of the writing period T(M), it is possible to Set multiple time periods. It is only necessary to set a period of time for setting the potential at "S" for refresh so that the memory thyristor M which was turned off after being turned on is turned on again. Therefore, the length of the period t3 and the reset period t5 can be set individually. the
<第三示例性实施例> <Third Exemplary Embodiment>
图11是示出了第三示例性实施例中的发光装置65中的信号生成电路100的结构以及信号生成电路100与每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)之间的布线结构的示意图。 11 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the
第三示例性实施例与图4所示的第一示例性实施例之间的差别在于在第三示例性实施例中新设置的消除信号生成单元140。消除信号生成生成单元140用于信号生成单元100,把用于消除每个栅极端 子Gm的寄生电容中蓄积的电荷的消除信号φe发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。 The difference between the third exemplary embodiment and the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 4 lies in the cancellation
在电路板62上,除了图4所示的第一示例性实施例的结构之外,新设置了消除信号线102。消除信号线102把来自信号生成电路100的消除信号生成单元140的消除信号φe发送到发光部分63。消除信号线102并联连接到发光芯片C(C1到C60)的φe端子(参见稍后描述的图12)。 On the
其它结构与图4所示的第一示例性实施例中的结构相同。因此,在第三示例性实施例中,对与第一示例性实施例中的部件相同的部件给予相同的附图标记,并且省略其具体描述。 Other structures are the same as those in the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 4 . Therefore, in the third exemplary embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first exemplary embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted. the
在第一示例性实施例中,接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势在存储器晶闸管M关断之后从0V变成-3.3V。这种变化率由如下时间常数确定,该时间常数由存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm来定义。因此,不允许独立于时段t3来设定用于对存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的存储信息进行复位的复位时段t5。在第三示例性实施例中,通过强制利用消除信号φe设定栅极端子Gm的电势来将复位时段t5设定得较短。 In the first exemplary embodiment, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M which is turned off after being turned on is changed from 0 V to −3.3 V after the memory thyristor M is turned off. This rate of change is determined by a time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M and the power supply line resistance Rm. Therefore, it is not allowed to set the reset period t5 for resetting the storage information of the memory thyristor M of which the memory thyristor M has been turned on independently of the period t3. In the third exemplary embodiment, the reset period t5 is set shorter by forcibly setting the potential of the gate terminal Gm with the erase signal φe. the
在第三示例性实施例中,把基准电势Vsub、电源电势Vga、第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2和消除信号φe共同地发送到所有发光芯片C(C1到C60)。根据图像数据集,把存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)单独发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。把每个点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)发送到相应两个发光芯片C(C1到C60)中。 In the third exemplary embodiment, the reference potential Vsub, the power supply potential Vga, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, and the erasing signal φe are commonly sent to all the light emitting chips C (C1 to C60). According to the image data set, the memory signals φm (φm1 to φm60) are individually sent to the light-emitting chips C (C1 to C60). Each lighting signal φI (φI1 to φI30) is sent to corresponding two light emitting chips C (C1 to C60). the
图12是说明第三示例性实施例中作为自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED)芯片的发光芯片C(C1到C60)的电路结构的示意图。这里,将发光芯片C1作为实例进行描述。然而,其它发光芯片C2到C60具有与发光芯片C 1相同的结构。注意,在图12中,主要示出了包括转移晶闸管T1到T4、存储器晶闸管M1到M4和发光晶闸管L1到L4的部分。 12 is a schematic diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of light-emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ) as self-scanning light-emitting element array (SLED) chips in the third exemplary embodiment. Here, the light-emitting chip C1 is described as an example. However, the other light emitting chips C2 to C60 have the same structure as the light emitting chip C1. Note that in FIG. 12 , a portion including transfer thyristors T1 to T4 , memory thyristors M1 to M4 , and light-emitting thyristors L1 to L4 is mainly shown. the
第三示例性实施例与图5所示的第一示例性实施例之间的不同 之处在于新设置的作为消除元件实例的消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…。 The difference between the third exemplary embodiment and the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 5 lies in newly provided canceling diodes Sd1, Sd2, Sd3, . . . as examples of canceling elements. the
发光芯片C1(C)包括直线排列在基板80上的消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…。消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…可以是肖特基二极管。如果不区分消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…,则它们被称为消除极管Sd。 The light emitting chip C1 (C) includes cancellation diodes Sd1 , Sd2 , Sd3 . . . arranged in a line on the
接下来,将描述发光芯片C1(C)中的消除二极管Sd的电连接。 Next, the electrical connection of the cancellation diode Sd in the light emitting chip C1(C) will be described. the
消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…的每个阳极端子连接到存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的对应一个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…。 Each anode terminal of the cancellation diode Sd1, Sd2, Sd3... is connected to a corresponding one of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3... of the memory thyristor M1, M2, M3.... the
消除二极管即1、Sd2、Sd3…的阴极端子连接到消除信号线76。而且,消除信号线76连接到作为消除信号φe的输入端子的φe端子。消除信号线102(参见图11)连接到φe端子,消除信号φe被提供到φe端子。 The cathode terminals of the
接下来,将描述第三示例性实施例中的发光部分63的操作。如图11所示,第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2组成的信号对以及消除信号φe被共同提供到构成发光部分63的发光芯片C(C1到C60)。同时,基于图像数据集的存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)被单独提供到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。点亮信号φI(φI1到φ130)被分别提供到每个都由两个发光芯片C组成的对应发光芯片对,使得每个点亮信号φI由构成每一对的两个发光芯片C所共有,并且点亮信号φI被单独提供到构成不同对的发光芯片C。 Next, the operation of the
第三示例性实施例与第一示例性实施例的不同仅仅在于另外设置的消除二极管Sd。类似于第一示例性实施例中的描述,如果描述了发光芯片C1的操作,则就了解发光部分63的操作。因此,将以发光芯片C1作为实例来描述发光芯片C的操作。 The third exemplary embodiment differs from the first exemplary embodiment only in the additionally provided cancel diode Sd. Similar to the description in the first exemplary embodiment, if the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 is described, the operation of the light-emitting
图13是说明第三示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1(C)的操作的时序图。 FIG. 13 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) in the third exemplary embodiment. the
同样在图13中,假定时间以字母顺序从时间点a到时间点y。在图13中,示出了第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1、消除信号φe、点亮信号φI1和流入到各个存储器元件M1到M8的电流J(M1)到J(M8)。 Also in FIG. 13 , it is assumed that time is from time point a to time point y in alphabetical order. In FIG. 13, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1, the erasing signal φe, the lighting signal φI1, and the currents J(M1) to J( M8). the
图13示出了在使用均由图6所示的8个发光晶闸管L组成的组 来执行点亮控制情况下的点亮控制时段T(#A)。这里,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中,对组#A中的发光晶闸管L1到L8进行亮度控制。注意,点亮控制时段T(#A)之后是对组#B中的发光晶闸管L9到L16进行亮度控制的点亮控制时段T(#B),对组#C中的发光晶闸管L17到L24进行亮度控制的点亮控制时段T(#C),…但是省略了对点亮控制时段T(#C)的说明。 FIG. 13 shows a lighting control period T(#A) in the case where lighting control is performed using groups each composed of 8 light-emitting thyristors L shown in FIG. 6 . Here, in the lighting control period T(#A), brightness control is performed on the light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A. Note that the lighting control period T(#A) is followed by a lighting control period T(#B) for brightness control of the light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 in group #B, and brightness control for the light-emitting thyristors L17 to L24 in group #C. Lighting control period T(#C) of luminance control, . . . but description of the lighting control period T(#C) is omitted. the
注意,在图13所示的点亮控制时段T(#A)中,类似于第一示例性实施例,使得组#A中的8个发光晶闸管L1到L8当中的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8点亮(发光),同时保持发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7不点亮(熄灭)。换言之,假定打印图像数据集“11101001”。 Note that in the lighting control period T(#A) shown in FIG. 13 , similarly to the first exemplary embodiment, the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 among the eight light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A are , L5 and L8 light up (light), while keeping the light-emitting thyristors L4, L6 and L7 not light up (extinguish). In other words, assume that the image data set "11101001" is printed. the
在图13中,除了消除信号φe之外的信号的波形与图7所示的波形相同。因此,将只描述消除信号φe。 In FIG. 13 , the waveforms of signals other than the cancellation signal φe are the same as those shown in FIG. 7 . Therefore, only the cancellation signal φe will be described. the
这里,将描述点亮控制时段T(#A)中的消除信号φe的波形。 Here, the waveform of the erasure signal φe in the lighting control period T(#A) will be described. the
消除信号φe的电势在点亮控制时段T(#A)的开始时间点c处为“H”,在时间点v处从“H”变成“L”。随后,在时间点w处,其电势从“L”变成“H”。在点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点y处,其电势保持在“H”。 The potential of the erasing signal φe is "H" at the start time point c of the lighting control period T(#A), and changes from "H" to "L" at the time point v. Subsequently, at a time point w, its potential changes from "L" to "H". At the end time point y of the lighting control period T(#A), its potential is kept at "H". the
换言之,消除信号φe在点亮控制时段T(#A)中具有一次“L”电势。 In other words, the erasing signal φe has an "L" potential once in the lighting control period T(#A). the
将描述消除信号φe的操作。 The operation of canceling the signal φe will be described. the
如上所述,接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势从0V变成-3.3V。该变化率由如下时间常数确定,该时间常数由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电容Rm所定义。如上所述,如果栅极端子Gm的电势变化很慢,则由于时段t 3被设定很长所以可能有利,但是由于复位时段t5变得更长所以可能不利。 As described above, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M which is turned off after being turned on changes from 0V to -3.3V. This rate of change is determined by a time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line capacitance Rm. As described above, if the potential change of the gate terminal Gm is slow, it may be advantageous because the period t3 is set long, but it may be disadvantageous because the reset period t5 becomes longer. the
在第三示例性实施例中,为了控制复位时段t5,设置了消除信号φe,其强制地消除了栅极端子Gm的寄生电容中蓄积的电荷,并且从存储器晶闸管M中清除了存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储信息。 In the third exemplary embodiment, in order to control the reset period t5, an erasing signal φe that forcibly eliminates the charge accumulated in the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and clears the memory thyristor M from the memory thyristor M is set. Connected storage information. the
参考图12,将根据图13所示时序图描述发光部分63和发光芯片C1(C)的操作。 Referring to FIG. 12 , operations of the
注意,在图12中,仅示出了包括编号均为1-4的转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M、发光晶闸管L等的部分。包括编号均不小于5的晶闸管等的其它部分(图中未示出)重复上面的部分。在下面描述中,不仅描述了编号分别为1-4的元件,还描述了分别具有其它编号的元件。 Note that in FIG. 12 , only the part including the transfer thyristor T, the memory thyristor M, the light emitting thyristor L and the like whose numbers are all 1-4 is shown. The above part is repeated for other parts (not shown in the figure) including thyristors and the like whose numbers are not less than 5. In the following description, not only elements respectively numbered 1-4 but also elements respectively having other numbers are described. the
(初始状态) (initial state)
在图13所示的时序图中的时间点a处,在发光部分63的每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)上设置的Vsub端子被设定在基准电势Vsub(0V)。同时,每个Vga端子被设定在电源电势Vga(-3.3V)(参见图11)。 At time point a in the timing chart shown in FIG. 13 , the Vsub terminal provided on each light-emitting chip C ( C1 to C60 ) of the light-emitting
另外,信号生成电路100的转移信号生成单元120把第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2的电势设定在“H”,存储器信号生成单元130把存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)的电势设定在“H”,消除信号生成单元140把消除信号φe的电势设定在“H”,点亮信号生成单元110把点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)的电势设定在“H”(参见图11)。 In addition, the transfer
除了消除信号φe之外的信号引起发光部分63和发光信号C(C1到C60)的状态与第一示例性实施例中描述的状态相同。下文将主要描述与消除信号φe有关的部分。 The states of the signal-causing light-emitting
当消除信号φe的电势变成“H”时,消除信号线102的电势变成“H”,并且由此每个发光芯片C的消除信号线76通过每个发光芯片C的φe端子而变成“H”。由于消除信号φe被共同发送到发光芯片C,所以如果描述了发光芯片C1的操作,则就了解发光芯片C的操作。 When the potential of the erasing signal φe becomes “H”, the potential of the erasing
在下文,将以发光芯片C1作为实例主要描述与发光芯片C的消除信号φe有关的操作。其它发光芯片C2到C60与发光芯片C1并行地类似于发光芯片C1执行操作。 Hereinafter, the operation related to the erasure signal φe of the light-emitting chip C will be mainly described taking the light-emitting chip C1 as an example. The other light emitting chips C2 to C60 perform operations similar to the light emitting chip C1 in parallel with the light emitting chip C1 . the
当消除信号φe的电势变成“H”时,消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…的阴极端子的电势变成“H”(0V)。 When the potential of the erasing signal φe becomes "H", the potentials of the cathode terminals of the erasing diodes Sd1 , Sd2 , Sd3 . . . become "H" (0 V). the
另一方面,如在第一示例性实施例中所述,存储器晶闸管M1的栅极端子Gm1的电势通过正向偏置的启动二极管Ds和连接二极管Dm1而变成-2.6V。各个编号不小于2的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm通过三级或更多级正向二极管连接到设定在“H”(0V)电势的启动二极管Ds的阳极端子(例如,栅极端子Gm2通过启动二极管Ds、耦合二极管Dc1和连接二极管Dm2这三级与启动二极管Ds的阳极端子连接)。因此,这些栅极端子Gm的电势变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。消除二极管Sd的阳极端子分别连接到栅极端子Gm。 On the other hand, as described in the first exemplary embodiment, the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 of the memory thyristor M1 becomes -2.6V by the forward-biased start diode Ds and connection diode Dm1. The gate terminals Gm of the memory thyristors M whose respective numbers are not less than 2 are connected to the anode terminals of the start diode Ds set at "H" (0 V) potential (for example, the gate terminal Gm2) through three or more stages of forward diodes. The anode terminal of the start diode Ds is connected via three stages of the start diode Ds, the coupling diode Dc1 and the connection diode Dm2). Therefore, the potential of these gate terminals Gm becomes the power supply potential Vga (-3.3 V). The anode terminals of the cancellation diodes Sd are connected to the gate terminals Gm, respectively. the
因此,所有消除二极管Sd都被反向偏置。这样,栅极端子Gm的电势不会受到消除信号φe的影响。 Therefore, all cancellation diodes Sd are reverse biased. In this way, the potential of the gate terminal Gm is not affected by the cancel signal φe. the
(操作开始和运行条件) (operational start and operating conditions)
在点亮控制时段T(#A)中从时间点b到时间点s的时段是把图像数据集写入存储器晶闸管M1到M8的时段。在该时段中,消除信号φe的电势保持在“H”。因此,消除二极管Sd的阴极端子的电势被设定在0V(“H”)。同时,连接到消除二极管Sd的阳极端子的栅极端子Gm的每个电势的值在0V到-3.3V之间。在存储器晶闸管M接通时,栅极端子Gm的电势变成0V。同时,在存储器晶闸管M保持在关断状态而没有接通时,其电势变成-3.3V。随后,接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势从0V变成-3.3V,并且由此其栅极端子Gm的电势的值在0V到-3.3V之间。 The period from the time point b to the time point s in the lighting control period T(#A) is a period in which the image data set is written in the memory thyristors M1 to M8. During this period, the potential of the erasing signal φe is kept at "H". Therefore, the potential of the cathode terminal of the cancel diode Sd is set at 0 V ("H"). Meanwhile, each potential value of the gate terminal Gm connected to the anode terminal of the cancellation diode Sd is between 0V and −3.3V. When the memory thyristor M is turned on, the potential of the gate terminal Gm becomes 0V. Meanwhile, while the memory thyristor M remains in the off state without being turned on, its potential becomes -3.3V. Subsequently, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M turned off after being turned on is changed from 0V to −3.3V, and thus the value of the potential of the gate terminal Gm thereof is between 0V and −3.3V. the
因此,在从时间点b到时间点s的时段内,消除二极管Sd至少没有被正向偏置。因而,栅极端子Gm的电势没有受到消除信号φe的影响。 Therefore, during the period from the time point b to the time point s, the cancellation diode Sd is at least not forward biased. Thus, the potential of the gate terminal Gm is not affected by the erasing signal φe. the
因此,从时间点b到时间点s的时段中的点亮芯片C1(C)的操作与第一示例性实施例中的操作相同。 Therefore, the operation of the lighting chip C1 (C) in the period from the time point b to the time point s is the same as that in the first exemplary embodiment. the
在时间点t处,类似于第一示例性实施例,通过把点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势从“H”变成“Le”,使得发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8接通而点亮(发光)。同样在该状态下,消除二极管Sd至少没有被正向偏置。因而,栅极端子Gm的电势没有受到消除信号φe 的影响。 At a time point t, similarly to the first exemplary embodiment, by changing the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) from “H” to “Le”, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are turned on. And light up (glow). Also in this state, the cancellation diode Sd is at least not forward biased. Thus, the potential of the gate terminal Gm is not affected by the cancel signal φe. the
随后,在时间点u处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“S”变成“H”。因此,处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8关断,并且栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势开始从0V变成-3.3V。同时,保持在关断状态的存储器晶闸管M4、M6和M7的栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7的电势通过电源电势Vga保持在3.3V。 Subsequently, at a time point u, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” to “H”. Accordingly, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 , and M8 in the on state are turned off, and the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 , Gm5 , and Gm8 start to change from 0V to −3.3V. At the same time, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm4 , Gm6 , and Gm7 of the memory thyristors M4 , M6 , and M7 kept in the off state are kept at 3.3 V by the power supply potential Vga. the
如上所述,在“S”被设定在-2.5V并且“L”被设定在-3.3V的第三示例性实施例中,为了使得存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的存储信息复位,要求使得栅极端子Gm的电势小于-2V。 As described above, in the third exemplary embodiment in which "S" is set at -2.5V and "L" is set at -3.3V, in order for the stored information of the memory thyristor M which the memory thyristor M has turned on Resetting requires making the potential of the gate terminal Gm smaller than -2V. the
在时间点v处,消除信号φe的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。因此,消除二极管Sd的阴极端子的电势变成-3.3V。同时,消除二极管Sd的阳极端子分别连接到上述存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm。接通之后已经关断的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8的栅极端子Gm的电势在时间点u处开始从0V变成-3.3V。因而,消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3、Sd5和Sd8被正向偏置。因此,栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势变成这样的值(-2.5V),该值是通过从-3.3V(“L”)中减去消除二极管Sd的正向电势Vs(0.8V)而得到的。换言之,通过把消除信号φe的电势从“H”变成“L”,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势被强制设定在-2.5V,并且加速了栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势变化。 At the time point v, the potential of the erasing signal φe changes from "H" (0 V) to "L" (-3.3 V). Therefore, the potential of the cathode terminal of the cancellation diode Sd becomes -3.3V. Meanwhile, the anode terminals of the cancel diodes Sd are connected to the gate terminals Gm of the above-mentioned memory thyristors M, respectively. The potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 , and M8 , which have been turned off after being turned on, starts to change from 0 V to −3.3 V at the time point u. Thus, the cancellation diodes Sd1, Sd2, Sd3, Sd5 and Sd8 are forward biased. Therefore, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 become values (-2.5V) obtained by subtracting the forward potential of the cancellation diode Sd from -3.3V ("L") Vs (0.8V) and get. In other words, by changing the potential of the cancel signal φe from "H" to "L", the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M that has been turned on is forcibly set at -2.5V, and the gate terminal Gm1, Potential changes of Gm2, Gm3, Gm5 and Gm8. the
由于使用Al电极的肖特基二极管的正向电势Vs(0.8V)小于p-n结的扩散电势Vd(1.3V),所以已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势可以设定在较低电势。注意,除了Al之外,Au、Pt、Ti、Mo、W、WSi、TaSi等也可以用作肖特基二极管的电极。 Since the forward potential Vs (0.8V) of the Schottky diode using the Al electrode is smaller than the diffusion potential Vd (1.3V) of the p-n junction, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M that has been turned on can be set at a lower low potential. Note that, in addition to Al, Au, Pt, Ti, Mo, W, WSi, TaSi, or the like can also be used as the electrode of the Schottky diode. the
注意,存储器晶闸管M4、M6和M7的栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7的电势不会从-3.3V发生变化。 Note that the potentials of the gate terminals Gm4, Gm6, and Gm7 of the memory thyristors M4, M6, and M7 do not change from -3.3V. the
在时间点v处,第二转移信号φ2的电势从“L”变成“H”,并且转移晶闸管T8关断。如果转移晶闸管T8处于导通状态,则栅极端子Gt8的电势为0V。另外,通过连接二极管Dm8连接到栅极端子Gt8的栅极端子Gm8为-1.3V。然而,当转移晶闸管T8关断时,栅极 端子Gt8的电势从0V变成-3.3V。 At the time point v, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is changed from “L” to “H”, and the transfer thyristor T8 is turned off. If the transfer thyristor T8 is in the on state, the potential of the gate terminal Gt8 is 0V. In addition, the gate terminal Gm8 connected to the gate terminal Gt8 through the connection diode Dm8 is -1.3V. However, when the transfer thyristor T8 is turned off, the potential of the gate terminal Gt8 changes from 0V to -3.3V. the
在时间点v处,同时执行消除信号φe从“H”到“L”的电势变化以及第二转移信号φ2从“L”到“H”的电势变化。如果在第二转移信号φ2执行从“L”到“H”的电势变化之前执行消除信号φe从“H”到“L”的电势变化,则通过正向偏置的连接二极管Dm8把栅极端子Gm的电势固定在-1.3V。因而,消除二极管Sd8把栅极端子Gm8的电势设定在较低值(-2.5V)的效果就失去了。因此,可以在消除信号φe从“H”到“L”的电势变化之前执行第二转移信号φ2从“L”到“H”的电势变化。 At the time point v, the potential change of the cancel signal φe from “H” to “L” and the potential change of the second transfer signal φ2 from “L” to “H” are performed simultaneously. If the potential change of the cancel signal φe from “H” to “L” is performed before the potential change of the second transfer signal φ2 from “L” to “H”, the gate terminal is connected by the forward biased connection diode Dm8 The potential of Gm was fixed at -1.3V. Thus, the effect of the cancellation diode Sd8 to set the potential of the gate terminal Gm8 at a lower value (-2.5V) is lost. Therefore, the potential change of the second transfer signal φ2 from “L” to “H” can be performed before the potential change of the cancel signal φe from “H” to “L”. the
在时间点w处,消除信号φe的电势从“L”变成“H”。因此,阴极端子的电势变成0V,而阳极端子(栅极端子Gm)的电势变成-2.5V,并且由此消除二极管Sd被反向偏置。因此,栅极端子Gm的电势没有受到消除信号φe的影响,并且变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V),栅极端子Gm通过各个电源线电阻Rm连接到电源电势Vga。 At the time point w, the potential of the erasing signal φe changes from "L" to "H". Therefore, the potential of the cathode terminal becomes 0 V, and the potential of the anode terminal (gate terminal Gm) becomes −2.5 V, and thereby the cancellation diode Sd is reverse biased. Therefore, the potential of the gate terminal Gm is not affected by the cancel signal φe, and becomes the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V), and the gate terminal Gm is connected to the power supply potential Vga through each power supply line resistance Rm. the
如上所述,通过消除信号φe(通过把其电势从“H”变成“L”),接通之后已经关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势被强制地设定在这样的值:该值是通过从“L”(-3.3V)中减去消除二极管Sd的正向电势Vs而得到的,并且由此存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的存储器被强制复位,并且复位时段t5变得更短。因此,可以独立于时间常数来设定复位时段t5,该时间常数由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm定义。因此,可以独立地设定时段t3和复位时段t5。 As described above, by eliminating the signal φe (by changing its potential from “H” to “L”), the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M which has been turned off after being turned on is forcibly set at such a value : This value is obtained by subtracting the forward potential Vs of the cancellation diode Sd from "L" (-3.3V), and thus the memory of the memory thyristor M whose memory thyristor M has been turned on is forced to be reset, and reset The period t5 becomes shorter. Therefore, the reset period t5 can be set independently of the time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm. Therefore, the period t3 and the reset period t5 can be set independently. the
注意,在第三示例性实施例中,肖特基二极管用作消除极管Sd。 Note that in the third exemplary embodiment, a Schottky diode is used as the snubber Sd. the
第三示例性实施例中使用的晶闸管(发光晶闸管L、转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M)每一个均可以由pnpn结构构成,其中按如下顺序在基板上层叠了第一p型半导体层、第二n型半导体层、第三p型半导体层和第四n型半导体层,但是这里省略了其具体描述。在此情况下,作为最顶层的第四n型半导体层与接下来的第三p型半导体层之间的p-n结可以用作二极管。然而,在该二极管之下,存在第二 n型半导体层和第一p型半导体层。通过这种结构,如果想把第四n型半导体层与第三p型半导体层之间的p-n结用作二极管,则有可能使得具有由第一p型半导体层、第二n型半导体层、第三p型半导体层和第四n型半导体层构成的pnpn结构的晶闸管(寄生晶闸管)接通(锁定)。 The thyristors (light-emitting thyristor L, transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M) used in the third exemplary embodiment may each be constituted by a pnpn structure in which a first p-type semiconductor layer, a second n-type semiconductor layer, third p-type semiconductor layer, and fourth n-type semiconductor layer, but detailed description thereof is omitted here. In this case, the p-n junction between the fourth n-type semiconductor layer as the topmost layer and the next third p-type semiconductor layer can function as a diode. However, below the diode there is a second n-type semiconductor layer and a first p-type semiconductor layer. With this structure, if it is desired to use the p-n junction between the fourth n-type semiconductor layer and the third p-type semiconductor layer as a diode, it is possible to make a junction consisting of the first p-type semiconductor layer, the second n-type semiconductor layer, The thyristor (parasitic thyristor) of the pnpn structure constituted by the third p-type semiconductor layer and the fourth n-type semiconductor layer is turned on (locked). the
可选地,如果通过去除作为最顶层的第四n型半导体层并且设置使得与表面暴露的第三p型半导体层实现肖特基接触的材料来配置肖特基二极管,则就不再构成pnpn结构。因而,可以抑制寄生晶闸管的接通(锁定)。 Alternatively, if a Schottky diode is configured by removing the fourth n-type semiconductor layer that is the topmost layer and providing a material that makes a Schottky contact with the surface-exposed third p-type semiconductor layer, the pnpn is no longer formed. structure. Thus, it is possible to suppress the turn-on (lock-up) of the parasitic thyristor. the
<第四示例性实施例> <Fourth Exemplary Embodiment>
图14是示出了第四示例性实施例中的发光装置65中的信号生成电路100的结构以及信号生成电路100与每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)之间的布线结构的示意图。 14 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the
第四示例性实施例与图4所示的第一示例性实施例之间的不同之处在于在第四示例性实施例中新设置的保持信号生成单元150。保持信号生成单元150用于信号生成电路100以把保持信号φb发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60),该保持信号φb用于临时保持发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)用来点亮。 The difference between the fourth exemplary embodiment and the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 4 lies in a hold
因而,除了图4所示的第一示例性实施例中的结构之外,还在电路板62上新设置了保持信号线103。这里,保持信号线103把来自信号生成电路100的保持信号生成单元150的保持信号φb发送到发光部分63。保持信号线103并联连接到发光芯片C(C1到C60)的φb端子(参见稍后描述的图15)。 Thus, the
其它结构与图4所示的第一示例性实施例的结构相同。因而,在第四示例性实施例中,对与第一示例性实施例中的部件相同的部件给予了相同的附图标记,并且省略其具体描述。 Other structures are the same as those of the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 4 . Thus, in the fourth exemplary embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first exemplary embodiment, and detailed description thereof is omitted. the
在第一示例性实施例中,通过把与根据图像数据集将要按顺序点亮的多个发光晶闸管L对应的多个存储器晶闸管M接通,对将要引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)进行存储。随后,在与将要引 起点亮的发光晶闸管L对应的所有存储器晶闸管M被设定在导通状态之后,点亮信号φI被提供到发光晶闸管L,并且发光晶闸管L接通而点亮(发光)。例如,如图7所示,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中从时间点c到时间点s的时段中,图像数据集被写入存储器晶闸管M,而在从时间点t到时间点x的发光时段t4,发光晶闸管L被设定成点亮(导通)状态。 In the first exemplary embodiment, by turning on the plurality of memory thyristors M corresponding to the plurality of light-emitting thyristors L to be sequentially lit according to the image data set, the position (No. ) for storage. Subsequently, after all the memory thyristors M corresponding to the light-emitting thyristor L to cause lighting are set in the on state, the lighting signal φI is supplied to the light-emitting thyristor L, and the light-emitting thyristor L is turned on to light (emit light ). For example, as shown in FIG. 7, in the period from time point c to time point s in the lighting control period T(#A), the image data set is written into the memory thyristor M, and in the period from time point t to time point During the light-emitting period t4 of x, the light-emitting thyristor L is set in a lighted (conducting) state. the
然而,在第一示例性实施例中,直到发光晶闸管L的发光时段t4结束,才可以把与点亮控制时段T(#B)对应的图像数据集写入存储器晶闸管M中。 However, in the first exemplary embodiment, the image data set corresponding to the lighting control period T(#B) cannot be written in the memory thyristor M until the light emitting period t4 of the light emitting thyristor L ends. the
在第四示例性实施例中,在一组中的发光晶闸管L的发光时段t4中,也可以执行向下一组的写入。因此,可以增加发光占空比,该发光占空比是每单位时间的发光时段的比率。 In the fourth exemplary embodiment, in the light emitting period t4 of the light-emitting thyristors L in one group, writing to the next group can also be performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light emission duty ratio, which is the ratio of the light emission period per unit time. the
图15是说明第四示例性实施例中作为自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED)芯片的发光芯片C的电路结构的示意图。注意,这里通过以发光芯片C1作为实例进行描述。然而,其它发光芯片C2到C60具有与发光芯片C1相同的结构。 FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of a light-emitting chip C as a self-scanning light-emitting element array (SLED) chip in the fourth exemplary embodiment. Note that description is made here by taking the light-emitting chip C1 as an example. However, the other light emitting chips C2 to C60 have the same structure as the light emitting chip C1. the
除了图5所示的第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1的结构之外,第四示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1还包括由直线排列在基板80上的作为保持元件实例的保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…组成的保持晶闸管阵列(保持元件阵列)。除了在第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1的结构之外,发光芯片C1还包括连接二极管Db1、Db2、Db3…。而且,除了第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1的结构之外,发光芯片C1还包括电源线电阻Rb1、Rb2、Rb3…以及电阻Rc1、Rc2、Rc3…。 In addition to the structure of the light emitting chip C1 in the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 5 , the light emitting chip C1 in the fourth exemplary embodiment includes holding thyristors as an example of holding elements arranged in a line on the
这里,类似于第一示例性实施例,如果不区分保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…,则它们被称为保持晶闸管B。同样,如果不分别区分连接二极管Db1、Db2、Db3…,电源线电阻Rb1、Rb2、Rb3…以及电阻Rc1、Rc2、Rc3…,则它们被分别称为连接二极管Db、电源线电阻Rb以及电阻Rc。 Here, similar to the first exemplary embodiment, if the holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 . . . are not distinguished, they are referred to as holding thyristors B. Likewise, connection diodes Db1, Db2, Db3..., power line resistances Rb1, Rb2, Rb3..., and resistances Rc1, Rc2, Rc3... are called connection diodes Db, power line resistance Rb, and resistance Rc, respectively, if they are not distinguished separately . the
注意,保持晶闸管B是如下半导体元件:每个半导体元件都具有三个端子,分别是阳极端子(阳极)、阴极端子(阴极)和栅极 端子(栅极),类似于转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L中的三个端子。 Note that holding thyristor B is a semiconductor element as follows: each semiconductor element has three terminals, namely an anode terminal (anode), a cathode terminal (cathode) and a gate terminal (gate), similar to transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M and the three terminals in the light-emitting thyristor L. the
如果假定转移晶闸管T的数量设定为128,类似于第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1的数量,则保持晶闸管B的数量、电源线电阻Rb的数量以及电阻Rc的数量中的每一个都被设定为128。 If it is assumed that the number of transfer thyristors T is set to 128, similar to the number of light-emitting chips C1 in the first exemplary embodiment, each of the number of thyristors B, the number of power supply line resistors Rb, and the number of resistors Rc is maintained Both are set to 128. the
类似于第一示例性实施例中的转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…,保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…从图15中的左侧开始按照编号顺序排列,诸如B1、B2、B3…。类似地,连接二极管Db1、Db2、Db3…,电源线电阻Rb1、Rb2、Rb3…以及电阻Rc1、Rc2、Rc3…分别从图15中的左侧开始按照编号顺序排列。 Similar to the transfer thyristors T1 , T2 , T3 . . . in the first exemplary embodiment, the holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 . Similarly, connecting diodes Db1, Db2, Db3..., power supply line resistors Rb1, Rb2, Rb3... and resistors Rc1, Rc2, Rc3... are arranged in numerical order from the left in FIG. 15, respectively. the
其它结构与图5所示的第一示例性实施例中的结构相同。因而,在第四示例性实施例中,对与第一示例性实施例中的部件相同的部件给予相同的附图标记,并且省略其具体描述。 Other structures are the same as those in the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 5 . Thus, in the fourth exemplary embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first exemplary embodiment, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. the
接下来,将描述发光芯片C1的元件之间的电连接。 Next, electrical connections between elements of the light-emitting chip C1 will be described. the
如上所述,第四示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1具有这样的结构:额外设置了保持晶闸管B、连接二极管Db、电源线电阻Rb和电阻Rc。因而,主要描述新添加的元件的电连接。 As described above, the light-emitting chip C1 in the fourth exemplary embodiment has a structure in which the holding thyristor B, the connection diode Db, the power supply line resistance Rb, and the resistance Rc are additionally provided. Thus, electrical connections of newly added elements are mainly described. the
类似于转移晶闸管T1、T2、T3…的阳极端子,保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3的阳极端子连接到发光芯片C1的基板80。这些阳极端子通过设置在基板80上的Vsub端子连接到电源线104(参见图14)。基准电势Vsub被提供到该电源线104。保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…的栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3…通过与各个保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…对应地设置的各个电源线电阻Rb1、Rb2、Rb3…连接到电源线71。 Similar to the anode terminals of the transfer thyristors T1 , T2 , T3 . . . , the anode terminals of the holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 are connected to the
这里,如果不区分栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3…,则它们被称为栅极端子Gb。 Here, if the gate terminals Gb1 , Gb2 , Gb3 . . . are not distinguished, they are referred to as gate terminal Gb. the
保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…的阴极端子通过与各个保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…对应地设置的电阻Rc1、Rc2、Rc3…连接到保持信号线77。保持信号线77连接到作为保持信号φb的输入端子的φb端子。保持信号线103(参见图14)连接到φb端子,并且保持信号φb被提供到φb端子。 The cathode terminals of the holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 . . . are connected to the holding signal line 77 through resistors Rc1 , Rc2 , Rc3 . The hold signal line 77 is connected to a φb terminal which is an input terminal of a hold signal φb. A hold signal line 103 (see FIG. 14 ) is connected to the φb terminal, and a hold signal φb is supplied to the φb terminal. the
在图5所示的第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1中,存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm与发光晶闸管L的栅极端子Gl彼此直接相连。在第四示例性实施例中,与上面结构不同的是,保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…的栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3…通过各个连接二极管Db1、Db2、Db3…逐个连接到编号均与保持晶闸管B相同的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的各个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…。换言之,连接二极管Db1、Db2、Db3…的阴极端子连接到保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3…的各个栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3…,而连接二极管Db1、Db2、Db3…的阳极端子连接到存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的各个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…。另外,连接二极管Db沿着从存储器晶闸管M的各个栅极端子Gm到保持晶闸管B的各个栅极端子Gb的电流流动方向相连。 In the light emitting chip C1 in the first exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 5 , the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M and the gate terminal G1 of the light emitting thyristor L are directly connected to each other. In the fourth exemplary embodiment, unlike the above structure, the gate terminals Gb1, Gb2, Gb3... of the thyristors B1, B2, B3... are kept connected one by one through the respective connection diodes Db1, Db2, Db3. Respective gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 . . . of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 . . . keep the thyristor B the same. In other words, the cathode terminals of the connection diodes Db1, Db2, Db3... are connected to the respective gate terminals Gb1, Gb2, Gb3... of the holding thyristors B1, B2, B3..., while the anode terminals of the connection diodes Db1, Db2, Db3... are connected to the memory The respective gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3... of the thyristors M1, M2, M3... are. In addition, the connection diodes Db are connected along the direction of current flow from the respective gate terminals Gm of the memory thyristors M to the respective gate terminals Gb of the holding thyristors B. As shown in FIG. the
连接二极管Db连接到保持晶闸管B的各个栅极端子Gb和发光晶闸管L的各个栅极端子Gl。 The connection diode Db is connected to each gate terminal Gb of the holding thyristor B and each gate terminal G1 of the light emitting thyristor L. the
接下来,将描述第四示例性实施例中的发光部分63的操作。如图14所示,第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2组成的信号对以及保持信号φb被共同提供到构成发光部分63的发光芯片C(C1到C60)。同时,基于图像数据集的存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)被单独提供到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)被分别提供到每个都由两个发光芯片C组成的对应发光芯片对,使得每个点亮信号φI由构成每一对的两个发光芯片C所共有,并且被单独提供到构成不同对的发光芯片C。 Next, the operation of the
第四示例性实施例与第一示例性实施例的不同之处仅仅在于额外设置的保持晶闸管B。类似于第一示例性实施例中的描述,如果描述了发光芯片C1的操作,则就了解了发光部分63的操作。因此,通过以发光芯片C1作为实例来描述发光芯片C的操作。 The fourth exemplary embodiment differs from the first exemplary embodiment only in that a holding thyristor B is additionally provided. Similar to the description in the first exemplary embodiment, if the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 is described, the operation of the light-emitting
图16是说明第四示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1(C)的操作的时序图。在图16中,假定时间从时间点a到时间点ac(按照字母顺序从时间点a到时间点z,随后是时间点aa、ab和ac)。在图16中,示出了第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1、保持信号φb、点亮信号φI1以及流入各个存储器晶闸管M1到M8 的电流J(M1)到J(M8)的波形。 FIG. 16 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) in the fourth exemplary embodiment. In FIG. 16 , it is assumed that the time is from time point a to time point ac (time point a to time point z in alphabetical order, followed by time points aa, ab, and ac). In FIG. 16, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1, the hold signal φb, the lighting signal φI1, and the currents J(M1) to J(M8) flowing into the respective memory thyristors M1 to M8 are shown. ) waveform. the
图16示出了在使用均由图6所示的8个发光晶闸管L组成的组来执行点亮控制的情况下的点亮控制时段T(#A)(从时间点c到时间点y)以及点亮控制时段T(#B)的一部分(从时间点y开始以及随后的时段)。这里,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中,对组#A中的发光晶闸管L1到L8进行亮度控制,在点亮控制时段T(#B)中,对组#B中的发光晶闸管L9到L16进行亮度控制。注意,点亮控制时段T(#B)之后是对组#C中的发光晶闸管L17到L24进行亮度控制的点亮控制时段T(#C)等,但是省略其描述。 FIG. 16 shows a lighting control period T(#A) (from time point c to time point y) in the case where lighting control is performed using groups each composed of 8 light-emitting thyristors L shown in FIG. 6 And a part of the lighting control period T(#B) (from the time point y and subsequent periods). Here, in the lighting control period T(#A), brightness control is performed on the light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A, and in the lighting control period T(#B), the light-emitting thyristor L9 in the group #B is controlled. Go to L16 for brightness control. Note that the lighting control period T(#B) is followed by a lighting control period T(#C) of performing brightness control on the light-emitting thyristors L17 to L24 in the group #C, etc., but description thereof is omitted. the
在相互比较图16和图7的情况下,可以认识到第四示例性实施例中的点亮控制时段T(#A)(从时间点c到时间点y)比第一示例性实施例中的点亮控制时段T(#A)要短。换言之,在组#A中的发光晶闸管L1到L8的发光时段t4结束时的时间点aa之前的时间点y处,点亮控制时段T(#B)开始。 In the case of comparing FIG. 16 and FIG. 7 with each other, it can be recognized that the lighting control period T(#A) (from time point c to time point y) in the fourth exemplary embodiment is shorter than that in the first exemplary embodiment. The lighting control period T(#A) should be short. In other words, the lighting control period T(#B) starts at the time point y before the time point aa when the light emitting period t4 of the light emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A ends. the
注意,在图16所示的点亮控制时段T(#A)中,类似于第一示例性实施例中的情况,假定引起组#A中的8个发光晶闸管L1到L8中的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8点亮(发光),而发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7保持不点亮(熄灭)。而且,作为一个实例,假定在点亮控制时段T(#B)中引起发光晶闸管L9、L11和L12点亮(发光),同时发光晶闸管L10保持关断。换言之,假定在点亮控制时段T(#A)中打印图像数据集“11101001”,而在点亮控制时段T(#B)中打印图像数据集“1011…”。 Note that in the lighting control period T(#A) shown in FIG. 16 , it is assumed that the light-emitting thyristor L1 of the eight light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A is caused to light up similarly to the case in the first exemplary embodiment. , L2, L3, L5, and L8 light up (light up), while the light-emitting thyristors L4, L6, and L7 remain unlighted (off). Also, as an example, assume that the light-emitting thyristors L9 , L11 , and L12 are caused to light up (emit light) in the lighting control period T(#B) while the light-emitting thyristor L10 remains off. In other words, assume that the image data set "11101001" is printed in the lighting control period T(#A) and the image data set "1011..." is printed in the lighting control period T(#B). the
将描述各个信号的波形中与第一示例性实施例不同的部分。 Portions in waveforms of respective signals that are different from those in the first exemplary embodiment will be described. the
除了保持信号φb之外,从时间点a到时间点s的时段中的波形与第一示例性实施例中图7中所示的波形相同。 The waveforms in the period from the time point a to the time point s are the same as those shown in FIG. 7 in the first exemplary embodiment, except for the hold signal φb. the
在第四示例性实施例中添加的保持信号φb的电势在点亮控制时段T(#A)的开始时间点c处为“H”,并且在时间点t处从“H”变成“L”。随后,其电势在时间点v处从“L”变成“H”。其电势在点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点y处保持在“H”。 The potential of the hold signal φb added in the fourth exemplary embodiment is “H” at the start time point c of the lighting control period T(#A), and changes from “H” to “L” at the time point t. ". Subsequently, its potential changes from "L" to "H" at a time point v. Its potential is kept at "H" at the end time point y of the lighting control period T(#A). the
点亮信号φI1的电势在点亮控制时段T(#A)的开始时间点c处 为“H”,并且在点亮控制时段T(#A)的时间点u处从“H”变成“Le”,并且在点亮控制时段T(#B)的时间点aa处进一步从“Le”变成“H”。 The potential of the lighting signal φI1 is "H" at the start time point c of the lighting control period T(#A), and changes from "H" to "H" at the time point u of the lighting control period T(#A). Le", and further changes from "Le" to "H" at the time point aa of the lighting control period T(#B). the
在第一示例性实施例中,每组中的发光晶闸管L的发光时段t4包含在点亮控制时段(例如,点亮控制时段T(#A))中。然而,在第四示例性实施例中,发光晶闸管L的发光时段t4(从时间点u到时间点aa)包含在用于两组的点亮控制时段(例如,T(#A)和T(#B))中。 In the first exemplary embodiment, the light-emitting period t4 of the light-emitting thyristors L in each group is included in the lighting control period (for example, the lighting control period T(#A)). However, in the fourth exemplary embodiment, the light-emitting period t4 (from time point u to time point aa) of the light-emitting thyristor L is included in the lighting control periods for two groups (for example, T(#A) and T( #B)). the
除了上述要点之外,第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1(φm)以及流入存储器晶闸管M中的电流J(M1)到J(M8)的波形与第一示例性实施例中的波形相同,并且由此省略其具体描述。 In addition to the above points, the waveforms of the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1(φm), and the currents J(M1) to J(M8) flowing in the memory thyristor M are the same as those of the first exemplary embodiment. The waveforms in are the same, and thus their detailed descriptions are omitted. the
参考图15,根据图16所示的时序图描述发光部分63和发光芯片C的操作。除了与第四示例性实施例中新设置的保持晶闸管B有关的部分之外,发光芯片C的操作类似于第一示例性实施例中的发光芯片C的操作。因而,将主要描述与新设置的保持晶闸管B有关的发光芯片C的操作,而省略对类似于第一示例性实施例中的操作的描述。(初始状态) Referring to FIG. 15 , operations of the
在图16所示的时序图中的时间点a处,在发光部分63的每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)上设置的Vsub端子被设定在基准电势Vsub(0V)。同时,每个Vga端子被设定在电源电势Vga(-3.3V)(参见图14)。 At time point a in the timing chart shown in FIG. 16 , the Vsub terminal provided on each light-emitting chip C ( C1 to C60 ) of the light-emitting
另外,第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)以及保持信号φb被设定在“H”,并且点亮信号φI(φI1到φI30)的电势被设定在“H”。因此,在第四示例性实施例中添加的保持信号线103的电势变成“H”,并且每个发光芯片C的保持信号线77的电势通过每个发光芯片C的φb端子变成“H”。 In addition, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm (φm1 to φm60), and the hold signal φb are set at “H”, and the potential of the lighting signal φI (φI1 to φI30) is set at "H". Therefore, the potential of the
类似于其它晶闸管(转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L),保持晶闸管B的阳极端子连接到Vusb端并且被提供“H”(0V)。同时,保持晶闸管B的阴极端子连接到具有设定在“H”的电势的保 持信号线77。因此,保持晶闸管B的阳极端子和阴极端子的电势都变成“H”,并且由此保持晶闸管B处于关断状态。 Similar to other thyristors (transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M, and light emitting thyristor L), the anode terminal of holding thyristor B is connected to the Vusb terminal and supplied with "H" (0V). Meanwhile, the cathode terminal of the holding thyristor B is connected to the holding signal line 77 having the potential set at "H". Therefore, both the potentials of the anode terminal and the cathode terminal of the thyristor B are kept becoming "H", and thus the thyristor B is kept in an off state. the
由于其它晶闸管(转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和发光晶闸管L)与第一示例性实施例中的晶闸管相同,所以所有晶闸管(转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M、保持晶闸管B和发光晶闸管L)都处于关断状态。 Since other thyristors (transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M, and light-emitting thyristor L) are the same as those in the first exemplary embodiment, all thyristors (transfer thyristor T, memory thyristor M, holding thyristor B, and light-emitting thyristor L) are at off state. the
由于启动二极管Ds与第一示例性实施例中的启动二极管相同,所以通过启动二极管Ds使栅极端子Gt1的电势变成-1.3V。因而,转移晶闸管T1的阈值电压为-2.6V。 Since the start diode Ds is the same as that in the first exemplary embodiment, the potential of the gate terminal Gt1 becomes −1.3 V by the start diode Ds. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T1 is -2.6V. the
转移晶闸管T2的栅极端子Gt2的电势和存储器晶闸管M1的栅极端子Gm1的电势为-2.6V。然而,由于保持晶闸管B1的栅极端子Gb1通过两级正向偏置的二极管(连接二极管Dm1和连接二极管Db1)连接到电势为-1.3V的栅极端子Gt1,所以栅极端子Gb1没有受到电势为-1.3V的栅极端子Gt1的影响。因而,栅极端子Gb1的电势变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。保持晶闸管B的其它栅极端子Gb的电势也变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。因此,保持晶闸管B的阈值电压为-4.6V。(操作状态) The potential of the gate terminal Gt2 of the transfer thyristor T2 and the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 of the memory thyristor M1 are -2.6V. However, since the gate terminal Gb1 of the thyristor B1 is kept connected to the gate terminal Gt1 at a potential of -1.3 V through two stages of forward-biased diodes (connection diode Dm1 and connection diode Db1 ), the gate terminal Gb1 is not subjected to the potential Influence of -1.3V on the gate terminal Gt1. Thus, the potential of the gate terminal Gb1 becomes the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V). The potential of the other gate terminal Gb of the holding thyristor B also becomes the power supply potential Vga (-3.3V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of thyristor B is maintained at -4.6V. (operating status)
类似于第一示例性实施例中的情况,当第一转移晶闸管φ1的电势在时间点b处从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)时,转移晶闸管T1进入导通状态。 Similar to the case in the first exemplary embodiment, when the potential of the first transfer thyristor φ1 changes from “H” (0 V) to “L” (−3.3 V) at time point b, the transfer thyristor T1 comes into conduction state. the
与存储器晶闸管M从时间点c到时间点s有关的操作与第一示例性实施例中的操作相同。注意,假定图16中从时间点c到时间点s的时段与图7中从时间点c到时间点s的时段相等。 Operations related to the memory thyristor M from time point c to time point s are the same as those in the first exemplary embodiment. Note that it is assumed that the period from time point c to time point s in FIG. 16 is equal to the period from time point c to time point s in FIG. 7 . the
将描述保持晶闸管B从时间点c到时间点s的操作。 The operation of holding thyristor B from time point c to time point s will be described. the
当存储器晶闸管M1在写入时段T(M1)的开始时间点c处接通时,栅极端子Gm1的电势变成“H”(0V),并且由此导通电流Jo流入存储器晶闸管M1中,这如电流J(M1)中所示。保持晶闸管B1的栅极端子Gb1通过正向偏置的连接二极管Db1连接到栅极端子Gm1。因而,保持晶闸管B1的栅极端子Gb1的电势变成-1.3V,而保持晶闸管B1 的阈值电压变成-2.6V。另外,由于栅极端子Gb1还连接到发光晶闸管L1的栅极端子Gl1,所以发光晶闸管L1的阈值电压也变成-2.6V。 When the memory thyristor M1 is turned on at the start time point c of the writing period T(M1), the potential of the gate terminal Gm1 becomes "H" (0 V), and thus the conduction current Jo flows into the memory thyristor M1, This is shown in current J(M1). The gate terminal Gb1 of the holding thyristor B1 is connected to the gate terminal Gm1 through a forward biased connection diode Db1 . Thus, the potential of the gate terminal Gb1 of the holding thyristor B1 becomes -1.3V, and the threshold voltage of the holding thyristor B1 becomes -2.6V. In addition, since the gate terminal Gb1 is also connected to the gate terminal Gl1 of the light-emitting thyristor L1, the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L1 also becomes -2.6V. the
然而,由于保持信号φb的电势在时间点c处为“H”(0V),所以保持晶闸管B1没有接通。另外,由于点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势也为“H”(0V),所以发光晶闸管L1也没有接通,由此没有点亮(发光)。 However, since the potential of the hold signal φb is “H” (0 V) at the time point c, the hold thyristor B1 is not turned on. In addition, since the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) is also “H” (0 V), the light-emitting thyristor L1 is also not turned on, and thus does not light up (emit light). the
注意,由于保持晶闸管B2的栅极端子Gb2通过三级正向偏置的二极管(耦合二极管Dc1、连接二极管Dm2和连接二极管Db2)连接到电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子Gt1,所以电势为“H”(0V)的栅极端子Gt1没有影响栅极端子Gb2,并且由此栅极端子Gb2保持在电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。因此,保持晶闸管B2的阈值电压为-4.6V。各个编号不小于3的保持晶闸管B与上述相同。此外,各个编号不小于2的发光晶闸管L与上述相同。 Note that since the gate terminal Gb2 of the holding thyristor B2 is connected to the gate terminal Gt1 of potential "H" (0 V) through three stages of forward-biased diodes (coupling diode Dc1, connection diode Dm2, and connection diode Db2), The gate terminal Gt1 at potential "H" (0 V) does not affect the gate terminal Gb2, and thus the gate terminal Gb2 is kept at the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V). Therefore, the threshold voltage of thyristor B2 is maintained at -4.6V. The holding thyristors B each numbered not less than 3 are the same as above. In addition, the light-emitting thyristors L whose respective numbers are not less than 2 are the same as above. the
当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点d处从“L”变化到“H”时,存储器晶闸管M1关断。栅极端子Gm1的电势开始从0V变化到-3.3V。通过这种变化,保持晶闸管B1的栅极端子Gb1的电势开始从-1.3V变化到-3.3V。发光晶闸管L1的栅极端子Gl1与上述相同,这是因为发光晶闸管L1的栅极端子Gl1连接到栅极端子Gb1的缘故。由于保持信号φb保持在电势“H”(0V),所以保持晶闸管B1没有接通。同样,由于点亮信号φI1(φI)保持在电势“H”(0V),所以发光晶闸管L1没有接通并且由此没有点亮(发光)。 When the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” to “H” at time point d, the memory thyristor M1 is turned off. The potential of the gate terminal Gm1 starts to change from 0V to -3.3V. With this change, the potential of the gate terminal Gb1 of the holding thyristor B1 starts to change from -1.3V to -3.3V. The gate terminal Gl1 of the light emitting thyristor L1 is the same as above because the gate terminal Gl1 of the light emitting thyristor L1 is connected to the gate terminal Gb1. Since the hold signal φb is held at the potential "H" (0 V), the hold thyristor B1 is not turned on. Also, since the lighting signal φI1 (φI) is kept at the potential “H” (0 V), the light-emitting thyristor L1 is not turned on and thus does not light up (emit light). the
在随后的写入时段T(M2)到T(M7)中,如在第一示例性实施例中所述的那样,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3和M5交替接通和关断。响应于此,保持晶闸管B1到B7的栅极端子Gb(发光晶闸管L1到L7的栅极端子Gl)的电势在-1.3V和-3.3V之间变化。因而,保持晶闸管B1到B7(发光晶闸管L1到L7)的阈值电压在-2.6V和-4.6V之间变化。在写入时段T(M1)到T(M7)中,由于保持信号φb的电势为“H”(0V),所以保持晶闸管B1到B7没有接通。另外,由于点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势也为“H”(0V),所以发光晶闸管L1到L7没有接通,并且由此没有点亮(发光)。 In the subsequent writing periods T(M2) to T(M7), the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, and M5 are alternately turned on and off as described in the first exemplary embodiment. In response thereto, the potentials of the gate terminals Gb of the thyristors B1 to B7 (the gate terminals G1 of the light-emitting thyristors L1 to L7 ) are kept varied between -1.3V and -3.3V. Thus, the threshold voltages of the thyristors B1 to B7 (light-emitting thyristors L1 to L7 ) are kept varied between -2.6V and -4.6V. In the writing period T( M1 ) to T( M7 ), since the potential of the hold signal φb is “H” (0 V), the thyristors B1 to B7 are not turned on. In addition, since the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) is also “H” (0 V), the light-emitting thyristors L1 to L7 are not turned on, and thus do not light up (emit light). the
类似于第一示例性实施例中的情况,当存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势在时间点r处从“H”变成“L”时,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8接通。 Similar to the case in the first exemplary embodiment, when the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “L” at the time point r, the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5, and M8 are turned on . the
即使存储器信号φm1(φm)在时间点s处从“L”变成“S”,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8也保持导通状态。 Even if the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “L” to “S” at the time point s, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 , and M8 maintain the on state. the
由于已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势变成0V,所以通过一级正向偏置二极管(连接二极管Db)连接到该栅极端子Gm的保持晶闸管B的栅极端子Gb的电势变成-1.3V。因此,该保持晶闸管B的阈值电压变成-2.6V。换言之,紧接着时间点s之后,保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8的阈值电压为-2.6V。同时,保持晶闸管B4、B6和B7的阈值电压保持在-4.6V。另外,各个编号不小于9的保持晶闸管B的阈值电压为-4.6V。 Since the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M that has been turned on becomes 0 V, the gate terminal Gb of the thyristor B that is connected to this gate terminal Gm through one stage of forward biased diode (connection diode Db) holds The potential becomes -1.3V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of the holding thyristor B becomes -2.6V. In other words, immediately after the time point s, the threshold voltages of the thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 , B5 and B8 are kept at -2.6V. At the same time, keep the threshold voltage of thyristors B4, B6 and B7 at -4.6V. In addition, the threshold voltage of each holding thyristor B whose number is not less than 9 is -4.6V. the
在时间点t处,保持信号φb的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。因而,阈值电压为-2.6V的保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8接通。其它保持晶闸管B没有接通。 At a time point t, the potential of the hold signal φb changes from "H" (0 V) to "L" (−3.3 V). Thus, the holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 , B5 and B8 with a threshold voltage of -2.6V are turned on. The other keeps thyristor B off. the
换言之,通过使得具有与处于导通状态的存储器晶闸管M相同编号的保持晶闸管B接通,与引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的编号(位置)有关的信息被复制到保持晶闸管B中,该信息由存储器晶闸管M进行存储。 In other words, by turning on the holding thyristor B having the same number as the memory thyristor M in the on-state, the information on the number (position) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused the lighting is copied to the holding thyristor B, which is determined by The memory thyristor M performs storage. the
注意,保持晶闸管B通过各个电阻Rc连接到保持信号线77。即使一个保持晶闸管B进入导通状态并且该保持晶闸管B的阴极端子的电势变成通过从该保持晶闸管B的阳极端子的电势“H”(0V)中减去扩散电势Vd(1.3V)而得到的值,保持信号线77还是保持在电势“L”。因而,多个保持晶闸管B(这里是保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8)准备同时接通。 Note that the holding thyristors B are connected to the holding signal line 77 through the respective resistors Rc. Even if a holding thyristor B comes into conduction state and the potential of the cathode terminal of the holding thyristor B becomes value, the signal line 77 is kept at the potential "L". Thus, a plurality of holding thyristors B (here, holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 , B5 and B8 ) are ready to be turned on simultaneously. the
当保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8接通时,栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3、Gb5和Gb8的电势变成作为阳极端子电势的0V。具有与各个栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3、Gb5和Gb8连接的各个栅极端子Gl1、Gl2、Gl3、Gl5和Gl8的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8的阈值电压变成-1.3V。同时,没有接通的保持晶闸管B4、B6和B7的栅极端子Gb4、 Gb6和Gb7的电势保持在-3.3V。因此,保持晶闸管B4、B6和B7的阈值电压为-4.6V。各个编号不小于9的保持晶闸管B的阈值电压为-4.6V。 When the thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 , B5 , and B8 are kept turned on, the potentials of the gate terminals Gb1 , Gb2 , Gb3 , Gb5 , and Gb8 become 0 V as the anode terminal potential. The threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 having the respective gate terminals Gl1, Gl2, Gl3, Gl5, and G18 connected to the respective gate terminals Gb1, Gb2, Gb3, Gb5, and Gb8 becomes -1.3V . At the same time, the potentials of the gate terminals Gb4, Gb6 and Gb7 of the holding thyristors B4, B6 and B7 which are not turned on are kept at -3.3V. Therefore, the threshold voltage of thyristors B4, B6 and B7 is maintained at -4.6V. The threshold voltage of each holding thyristor B whose number is not less than 9 is -4.6V. the
因此,转移晶闸管T8、存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8以及保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8保持在导通状态。 Therefore, the transfer thyristor T8, the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5, and M8, and the holding thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5, and B8 are kept in the on state. the
当点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势在时间点u处从“H”变成“Le”(-2.6V<“Le”≤-1.3V)时,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8接通并且点亮(发光)。 When the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “H” to “Le” (-2.6V<“Le”≤-1.3V) at the time point u, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 Switch on and light up (glow). the
注意,发光晶闸管L没有通过电阻连接到点亮信号线75。然而,由于点亮信号φI1(φI)是由电流驱动,所以多个发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8准备接通而无需电阻。 Note that the light-emitting thyristor L is not connected to the
而且,在时间点u处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“S”变成“H”。因此,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8关断。随后,栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势逐渐从0V变成-3.3V。注意,栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7的电势保持在-3.3V。 Also, at a time point u, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” to “H”. Therefore, the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5 and M8 are turned off. Subsequently, the potential of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 gradually changes from 0V to -3.3V. Note that the potentials of the gate terminals Gm4, Gm6, and Gm7 are kept at -3.3V. the
当栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势变得小于2V(<-2V)时,如上所述,即使存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势被设定在“L”,存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8也没有接通。换言之,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8的存储信息,即发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的存储信息丢失。 When the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 become smaller than 2 V (<−2 V), as described above, even if the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is set at “L”, the memory thyristor M1 , M2, M3, M5 and M8 are not connected either. In other words, the stored information of the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 and M8 that have been turned on, that is, the stored information of the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L is lost. the
在第四示例性实施例中,在时间点u之前的时间点t处,使得保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8接通,并且因此引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)被发送(复制)到保持晶闸管B。因此,在时间点u和随后的时段,如果有关引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的信息从存储器晶闸管M中丢失也不会有问题。 In the fourth exemplary embodiment, at a time point t before a time point u, the positions (numbers) of the light-emitting thyristors L that keep the thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5, and B8 turned on and thus cause lighting are Sent (copied) to holding thyristor B. Therefore, there is no problem if the information on the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused lighting is lost from the memory thyristor M at the point of time u and subsequent periods. the
而且,在时间点u处,第一转移信号φ1的电势从“H”变成“L”。因此,阈值电压为-2.6V的转移晶闸管T9接通。随后,转移晶闸管T9的栅极端子Gt9变成0V。另外,转移晶闸管T10的栅极端子Gt10的电势变成-1.3V,而转移晶闸管T10的阈值电压变成-2.6V。类似地,存储器晶闸管M9的阈值电压变成-2.6V。 Also, at the time point u, the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 is changed from "H" to "L". Therefore, the transfer thyristor T9 whose threshold voltage is -2.6V is turned on. Subsequently, the gate terminal Gt9 of the transfer thyristor T9 becomes 0V. In addition, the potential of the gate terminal Gt10 of the transfer thyristor T10 becomes -1.3V, and the threshold voltage of the transfer thyristor T10 becomes -2.6V. Similarly, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M9 becomes -2.6V. the
注意,在第四示例性实施例中,在时间点u处,点亮信号φI1(φI)从“H”到“Le”的电势变化、存储器信号φm1(φm)从“S”到“H”的电势变化、以及第一转移信号φ1从“H”到“L”的电势变化同时执行。这些变化可以以任意顺序执行。 Note that in the fourth exemplary embodiment, at the time point u, the potential change of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) from “H” to “Le”, the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “S” to “H” The potential change of , and the potential change of the first transfer signal φ1 from “H” to “L” are performed simultaneously. These changes can be performed in any order. the
具体地说,如果首先执行第一转移信号φ1从“H”到“L”的电势变化,则转移晶闸管T9接通并且存储器晶闸管M9的阈值电压变成-2.6V。即使在此情况下,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)为“S”(-2.5V),所以存储器晶闸管M9也没有接通。另外,尽管保持晶闸管B9的阈值电压为-3.9V,但是由于保持信号φb的电势为“L”(-3.3V),所以保持晶闸管B9没有接通。 Specifically, if the potential change of the first transfer signal φ1 from “H” to “L” is performed first, the transfer thyristor T9 is turned on and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M9 becomes -2.6V. Even in this case, since the memory signal φm1 (φm) is “S” (−2.5V), the memory thyristor M9 is not turned on. In addition, although the threshold voltage of the holding thyristor B9 is -3.9V, since the potential of the holding signal φb is "L" (-3.3V), the holding thyristor B9 is not turned on. the
可选地,如果在首先执行存储器信号φm1(φm)从“S”到“H”的电势变化之后执行第一转移信号φ1从“H”到“L”的电势变化,则转移晶闸管T9接通,并且存储器晶闸管M9的阈值电压变成-2.6V。然而,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势变成“H”(0V),所以存储器晶闸管M9没有接通。尽管保持晶闸管B9的阈值电压为-3.9V,但是由于保持信号φb的电势为-3.3V,所以保持晶闸管B9没有接通。 Alternatively, if the potential change of the first transfer signal φ1 from “H” to “L” is performed after the potential change of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “S” to “H” is first performed, the transfer thyristor T9 is turned on , and the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M9 becomes -2.6V. However, since the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) becomes “H” (0 V), the memory thyristor M9 is not turned on. Although the threshold voltage of the holding thyristor B9 is -3.9V, since the potential of the holding signal φb is -3.3V, the holding thyristor B9 is not turned on. the
可选地,如果首先执行第一转移信号φ1从“H”到“L”的电势变化,则转移晶闸管T9接通。结果,存储器晶闸管M9的阈值电压变成-2.6V,而发光晶闸管L9的阈值电压变成-3.9V。其后,即使点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势从“H”变成“Le”,发光晶闸管L9也没有接通。另外,由于存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势为“S”(-2.5V),存储器晶闸管M9没有接通。 Alternatively, if the potential change of the first transfer signal φ1 from “H” to “L” is performed first, the transfer thyristor T9 is turned on. As a result, the threshold voltage of the memory thyristor M9 becomes -2.6V, and the threshold voltage of the light-emitting thyristor L9 becomes -3.9V. Thereafter, even if the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “H” to “Le”, the light-emitting thyristor L9 is not turned on. In addition, since the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is “S” (−2.5 V), the memory thyristor M9 is not turned on. the
如上所述,上述三种变化的顺序不受限制。 As mentioned above, the sequence of the above three changes is not limited. the
紧接着时间点u之后,转移晶闸管T8和T9以及保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8保持在导通状态,并且发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point u, the transfer thyristors T8 and T9 and the holding thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5, and B8 are kept in the on state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are kept in the lighted (conducting) state. state. the
接下来,当第二转移信号φ2的电势在时间点v处从“L”变成“H”时,转移晶闸管T8关断。 Next, when the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is changed from “L” to “H” at the time point v, the transfer thyristor T8 is turned off. the
紧接着时间点v之后,转移晶闸管T9以及保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8保持在导通状态,并且发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和 L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point v, the transfer thyristor T9 and the holding thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5, and B8 are kept in the on state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are kept in the lighting (on) state. the
在时间点v处,保持信号φb的电势从“L”变成“H”。因此,保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8的各个阴极端子和阳极端子的电势为“H”,由此保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8不再保持在导通状态,并且关断。 At the time point v, the potential of the hold signal φb is changed from "L" to "H". Therefore, the potentials of the respective cathode terminals and anode terminals of the thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5 and B8 are kept at "H", thereby keeping the thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5 and B8 no longer in the conducting state, and turning off broken. the
因此,引起发光晶闸管L点亮的位置(编号)的存储信息从保持晶闸管B中丢失。然而,在时间点v之前的时间点u处,要引起点亮的发光晶闸管L已经被引起点亮,并且如果引起发光晶闸管L点亮的位置(编号)的存储信息从保持晶闸管B中丢失也没有问题。 Therefore, the stored information of the position (number) that caused the light-emitting thyristor L to light is lost from the holding thyristor B. However, at the time point u before the time point v, the light-emitting thyristor L to be caused to be turned on has already been caused to be turned on, and if the stored information of the position (number) at which the light-emitting thyristor L was caused to be turned on is lost from the holding thyristor B no problem. the
紧接着时间点v之后,转移晶闸管T9保持在导通状态,并且发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point v, the transfer thyristor T9 is kept in the on state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are kept in the lighted (on) state. the
随后,用于组#B中的发光晶闸管L9到L16的点亮控制时段T(#B)从时间点y开始。 Subsequently, the lighting control period T(#B) for the light-emitting thyristors L9 to L16 in the group #B starts from the time point y. the
在写入时段T(M9)的开始时间点y处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”从而写入引起发光晶闸管L9点亮的存储信息。因此,阈值电压为-2.6V的存储器晶闸管M9接通。 At the start time point y of the writing period T( M9 ), the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) is changed from “H” to “L” to write stored information causing the light-emitting thyristor L9 to light. Therefore, the memory thyristor M9 whose threshold voltage is -2.6V is turned on. the
此时,不再允许在点亮控制时段T(#A)中已经接通的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8接通。因而,在时间点y处,有必要使得这些存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8的阈值电压小于“L”“-3.3V”(<-3.3V),即栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势小于-2V(<-2V)。栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势变化由如下时间常数确定,该时间常数由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm定义。因而,从时间点u到时间点y的复位时段t5被设定成足够长,从而满足以上要求。 At this time, the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 , and M8 that have been turned on in the lighting control period T(#A) are no longer allowed to be turned on. Therefore, at time point y, it is necessary to make the threshold voltages of these memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5 and M8 smaller than "L" "-3.3V" (<-3.3V), that is, the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, The potentials of Gm3, Gm5 and Gm8 are less than -2V (<-2V). The potential changes of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 are determined by a time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm. Thus, the reset period t5 from the time point u to the time point y is set long enough so as to satisfy the above requirement. the
因此,紧接着在时间点y之后,转移晶闸管T9和存储器晶闸管M9保持在接通状态,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中的时间点u处已经点亮的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Therefore, immediately after the time point y, the transfer thyristor T9 and the memory thyristor M9 are kept in the ON state, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3 that have been lit at the time point u in the lighting control period T(#A) , L5 and L8 remain on (conducting) state. the
在时间点z处,为了避免发光晶闸管L10点亮,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“S”。 At time point z, in order to prevent the light-emitting thyristor L10 from lighting up, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “S”. the
紧接在时间点z之后,转移晶闸管T10和存储器晶闸管M9保持 在导通状态,并且发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8保持在点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point z, the transfer thyristor T10 and the memory thyristor M9 are kept in the on state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are kept in the lighted (on) state. the
在时间点aa处,点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势从“Le”变成“H”。因此,已经处于点亮(导通)状态的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8的各个阴极端子和阳极端子的电势为“H”,由此它们没有保持在导通状态,并且关断从而熄灭。 At time point aa, the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “Le” to “H”. Therefore, the potentials of the respective cathode terminals and anode terminals of the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 that have been in the lighting (conducting) state are "H", whereby they are not kept in the conducting state, and are turned off. thereby extinguished. the
紧接在时间点aa之后,转移晶闸管T10和存储器晶闸管M9保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the time point aa, the transfer thyristor T10 and the memory thyristor M9 are kept in the on state. the
换言之,被存储为在点亮控制时段T(#A)中引起点亮的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8在发光时段t 4中点亮(发光),该发光时段t4从包括在点亮控制时段T(#A)中的时间点u到包括在点亮控制时段T(#B)中的时间点aa。 In other words, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 stored to cause lighting in the lighting control period T(#A) are lighted (lighted) in the light-emitting period t4 from included in Time point u in the lighting control period T(#A) to time point aa included in the lighting control period T(#B). the
注意,用于发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8的发光时段t4的结束时间点不必是包括在写入时段T(M10)中的时间点aa。换言之,只需要发光时段t4的结束时间点是将要在点亮控制时段T(#B)中引起点亮的发光晶闸管L9、L11…开始点亮时的时间点之前的时间点即可。 Note that the end time point of the light emitting period t4 for the light emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 does not have to be the time point aa included in the writing period T( M10 ). In other words, it is only necessary that the end time point of the light emission period t4 be a time point before the time point when the light-emitting thyristors L9 , L11 . . . to cause lighting in the lighting control period T(#B) start lighting. the
在时间点ab处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“H”变成“L”从而存储引起发光晶闸管L11点亮的信息。 At time point ab, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “H” to “L” to store information that causes the light-emitting thyristor L11 to light. the
紧接着时间点ab之后,转移晶闸管T11以及存储器晶闸管M9和M11保持在导通状态。 Immediately after the time point ab, the transfer thyristor T11 and the memory thyristors M9 and M11 are kept in a conductive state. the
在时间点ab和随后的时段,基于图像数据集的存储器信号φm1(φm)的波形不同于前一时段中的波形。然而,由于类似于点亮控制时段T(#A)中的时间点k和随后的时段,所以省略其具体描述。 At time point ab and subsequent periods, the waveform of the image data set-based memory signal φm1 (φm) is different from that in the preceding period. However, since it is similar to the time point k in the lighting control period T(#A) and subsequent periods, a detailed description thereof is omitted. the
如上所述,在第四示例性实施例中,发光晶闸管L的点亮(发光)以及向存储引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的存储器晶闸管M的写入同时执行。因此,与第一示例性实施例的情况相比,可以以高发光占空比来执行发光晶闸管L的点亮(发光)。 As described above, in the fourth exemplary embodiment, lighting (emission of light) of the light-emitting thyristor L and writing to the memory thyristor M storing the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L causing lighting are performed simultaneously. Therefore, lighting (emission of light) of the light-emitting thyristor L can be performed at a high light-emitting duty ratio compared to the case of the first exemplary embodiment. the
因而,由打印头14对感光鼓12的写入时间变得更短。 Thus, the writing time to the
这得益于以下事实,通过设置保持晶闸管B,存储在存储器晶闸 管M中的引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)被发送到保持晶闸管B,从存储器晶闸管M中删除(清除)引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的存储信息,并且下一次引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)被存储在存储器晶闸管M中。 This is due to the fact that by setting the holding thyristor B, the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused the light-up stored in the memory thyristor M is sent to the holding thyristor B, deleted (cleared) from the memory thyristor M The storage information of the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused lighting, and the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused lighting next time is stored in the memory thyristor M. the
换言之,这得益于以下事实,通过在发光晶闸管L和存储器晶闸管M之间设置保持晶闸管B,防止了存储器晶闸管M的状态变化影响发光晶闸管L,并且切断了存储器晶闸管M与发光晶闸管L之间的电气关系。 In other words, this is due to the fact that by disposing the holding thyristor B between the light-emitting thyristor L and the memory thyristor M, the state change of the memory thyristor M is prevented from affecting the light-emitting thyristor L, and the connection between the memory thyristor M and the light-emitting thyristor L is cut off. electrical relationship. the
注意,在图16中,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中的图像数据集被设定成“11101001”,而点亮控制时段T(#B)中的图像数据集被设定成“101…”。类似于在第一示例性实施例中的情况,当引起发光晶闸管L点亮时,只需要存储器信号φm的电势设定在“L”,而在不引起发光晶闸管L点亮时,只需要存储器信号φm的电势设定在“S”。 Note that in FIG. 16, the image data set in the lighting control period T(#A) is set to "11101001", and the image data set in the lighting control period T(#B) is set to "11101001" 101...". Similar to the case in the first exemplary embodiment, only the potential of the memory signal φm is set at "L" when causing the light-emitting thyristor L to light up, and only the memory is required when the light-emitting thyristor L is not caused to light up. The potential of the signal φm is set at "S". the
因此,在一个发光时段t4中多个发光点(发光晶闸管L)准备同时点亮。因此,与对发光点(发光晶闸管L)逐个进行亮度控制的情况相比,允许每个发光芯片C的发光时段t4变短。从打印头14的方面来看,可以缩短对感光鼓12的写入时间。 Therefore, a plurality of light-emitting points (light-emitting thyristors L) are ready to light up simultaneously in one light-emitting period t4. Therefore, the light-emitting period t4 of each light-emitting chip C is allowed to be shortened compared with the case where the luminance is controlled one by one for the light-emitting points (light-emitting thyristors L). From the viewpoint of the
<第五示例性实施例> <Fifth Exemplary Embodiment>
图17是示出了第五示例性实施例中的发光装置65中的信号生成电路100的结构以及信号生成电路100与每个发光芯片C(C1到C60)之间的布线结构的示意图。 17 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of the
第五示例性实施例与图14所示第四示例性实施例的不同之处在于在第五示例性实施例中的新设置的在第三示例性实施例中描述的消除信号生成单元140。消除信号生成单元140用于信号生成电路100以把消除信号φe发送到发光芯片C(C1到C60),该消除信号φe用于消除在每个栅极端子Gm的寄生电容中蓄积的电荷。 The fifth exemplary embodiment differs from the fourth exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 14 in that the cancellation
因而,在电路板62上新设置了消除信号线102。消除信号线102把来自信号生成电路100的消除信号生成单元140中的消除信号φe发送到发光部分63。消除信号线102并联连接到发光芯片C(C1到 C60)的φe端子(参见稍后描述的图18)。其它结构与图14所示的第四示例性实施例中的结构相同。 Accordingly, the cancel
在第四示例性实施例中,存储在存储器晶闸管M中的引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)被发送到保持晶闸管B,并且随后从存储器晶闸管M中删除(清除)引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的存储信息,并且因此在发光晶闸管L的发光时段内把下次引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)存储在存储器晶闸管M中。然而,为了从存储器晶闸管M中删除(复位)引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的存储信息,需要等到栅极端子Gm的电势小于-2V(<-2V)。 In the fourth exemplary embodiment, the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused the lighting stored in the memory thyristor M is sent to the holding thyristor B, and then the location (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused the lighting is deleted (cleared) from the memory thyristor M. The storage information of the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L, and thus the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that causes lighting next time within the light-emitting period of the light-emitting thyristor L is stored in the memory thyristor M. However, in order to delete (reset) the stored information of the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused lighting from the memory thyristor M, it is necessary to wait until the potential of the gate terminal Gm is less than -2V (<-2V). the
在第五示例性实施例中,将第四示例性实施例与第三示例性实施例中描述的消除信号φe相结合,从而缩短到栅极端子Gm的电势小于-2V(<-2V)之前的复位时段t5。 In the fifth exemplary embodiment, the fourth exemplary embodiment is combined with the canceling signal φe described in the third exemplary embodiment, thereby shortening until the potential of the gate terminal Gm is less than -2V (<-2V). The reset period t5. the
注意,在第五示例性实施例中,对与第四示例性实施例中的那些部件相同的部件给予相同的附图标记,并且省略其具体描述。 Note that in the fifth exemplary embodiment, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the fourth exemplary embodiment, and a detailed description thereof is omitted. the
图18是说明第五示例性实施例中的作为自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED)芯片的发光芯片C(C1到C60)的电路结构的示意图。这里,将以发光芯片C1作为实例进行描述。然而,其它发光芯片C2到C60具有与发光芯片C1相同的结构。注意,在图18中。主要示出了包括转移晶闸管T1到T4、存储器晶闸管M1到M4以及发光晶闸管L1到L4的部分。 18 is a schematic diagram illustrating a circuit configuration of light-emitting chips C ( C1 to C60 ) which are self-scanning light-emitting element array (SLED) chips in the fifth exemplary embodiment. Here, the light-emitting chip C1 will be described as an example. However, the other light emitting chips C2 to C60 have the same structure as the light emitting chip C1. Note that in Figure 18. A portion including transfer thyristors T1 to T4 , memory thyristors M1 to M4 , and light-emitting thyristors L1 to L4 is mainly shown. the
与图14所示的第四示例性实施例不同之处在于在第五示例性实施例中新设置的消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…。 The difference from the fourth exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 14 lies in the elimination diodes Sd1 , Sd2 , Sd3 . . . newly provided in the fifth exemplary embodiment. the
发光芯片C1(C)包括在基板80上直线排列的消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…。类似于在第三示例性实施例中的那些消除二极管,消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…可以是肖特基二极管。 The light-emitting chip C1 (C) includes cancellation diodes Sd1 , Sd2 , Sd3 . . . arranged in a line on the
接下来,将描述在发光芯片C1(C)中的消除二极管Sd的电连接。消除二极管Sd的电连接与图12中所示的第三示例性实施例中的那些电连接相同。 Next, the electrical connection of the cancellation diode Sd in the light-emitting chip C1 (C) will be described. The electrical connections of the cancellation diode Sd are the same as those in the third exemplary embodiment shown in FIG. 12 . the
换言之,消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…的每个阳极端子连接到存 储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3…的对应一个栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3…。 In other words, each anode terminal of the cancellation diode Sd1, Sd2, Sd3... is connected to a corresponding one of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3... of the memory thyristor M1, M2, M3.... the
消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3…的阴极端子连接到消除信号线76。另外,消除信号线76连接到作为消除信号φe的输入端子的φe端子。消除信号线102(参见图17)连接到φe端子,并且消除信号φe被提供到φe端子。 The cathode terminals of the cancel diodes Sd1 , Sd2 , Sd3 . . . are connected to the cancel
接下来,将描述第五示例性实施例中的发光部分63的操作。第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ2组成的信号对、保持信号φb和消除信号φe被共同提供到构成发光部分63的发光芯片C(C1到C60),这如图17所示。同时,基于图像数据集的存储器信号φm(φm1到φm60)被单独提供到发光芯片C(C1到C60)。发光信号φI(φI1到φI30)被分别提供到每个都由两个发光芯片C组成的对应发光芯片对,使得每个点亮信号φI由构成每个对的两个发光芯片所共有,并且被单独提供到构成不同对的发光芯片C。 Next, the operation of the
第五示例性实施例与第四示例性实施例的不同之处在于额外设置的消除二极管Sd。类似于第四示例性实施例中的描述,如果描述了发光芯片C1的操作,就了解发光部分63的操作。因此,以发光芯片C1作为实例来描述发光芯片C的操作。 The fifth exemplary embodiment differs from the fourth exemplary embodiment in that the cancellation diode Sd is additionally provided. Similar to the description in the fourth exemplary embodiment, if the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 is described, the operation of the light-emitting
图19是说明第五示例性实施例中的发光芯片C1(C)的操作的时序图。同样在图19中,假定时间从时间点a到时间点ac(按字母顺序从时间点a到时间点z,以及随后的时间点aa、ab和ac)。在图19中,示出了第转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm1、保持信号φb、消除信号φe、点亮信号φI1和流入到各个存储器元件M1到M8的电流J(M1)到J(M8)的波形。 FIG. 19 is a timing chart illustrating the operation of the light-emitting chip C1 (C) in the fifth exemplary embodiment. Also in FIG. 19 , it is assumed that the time is from time point a to time point ac (time point a to time point z, and subsequent time points aa, ab, and ac in alphabetical order). In FIG. 19, the first transfer signal φ1, the second transfer signal φ2, the memory signal φm1, the hold signal φb, the erase signal φe, the lighting signal φI1, and the current J(M1) flowing into the respective memory elements M1 to M8 are shown. to the waveform of J(M8). the
图19示出了在使用均由图6所示的8个发光晶闸管L组成的组来执行点亮控制的情况下的点亮控制时段T(#A)(从时间点c到时间点y)和点亮控制时段T(#B)的一部分(从时间点y开始以及随后的时段)。这里,在点亮控制时段T(#A)中,对组#A中的发光晶闸管L1到L8进行亮度控制,在点亮控制时段T(#B)中,对组#B中的发光晶闸管L9到L16进行亮度控制。注意,点亮控制时段T(B)之后是对组#C中的发光晶闸管L17到L24进行亮度控制的点亮控制时段 T(#C),但是省略了其描述。 FIG. 19 shows a lighting control period T(#A) (from time point c to time point y) in the case where lighting control is performed using groups each composed of 8 light-emitting thyristors L shown in FIG. 6 and a part of the lighting control period T(#B) (from time point y and subsequent periods). Here, in the lighting control period T(#A), brightness control is performed on the light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A, and in the lighting control period T(#B), the light-emitting thyristor L9 in the group #B is controlled. Go to L16 for brightness control. Note that the lighting control period T(B) is followed by a lighting control period T(#C) for performing luminance control on the light-emitting thyristors L17 to L24 in the group #C, but description thereof is omitted. the
注意,在图19中的点亮控制时段T(#A)中,类似于第四示例性实施例中的情况,假定引起组#A中的8个发光晶闸管L1到L8中的发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8点亮(发光),发光晶闸管L4、L6和L7保持不点亮(熄灭)。同样,作为一个实例,假定在点亮控制时段T(#B)中引起发光晶闸管L9、L11和L12点亮(发光),同时发光晶闸管L10保持关断。假定在点亮控制时段T(#A)中打印图像数据集“11101001”,而在点亮控制时段T(#B)中打印图像数据集“1011…”。 Note that in the lighting control period T(#A) in FIG. 19 , similarly to the case in the fourth exemplary embodiment, it is assumed that the light-emitting thyristor L1 , of the eight light-emitting thyristors L1 to L8 in the group #A are caused to L2, L3, L5, and L8 light up (emit light), and light-emitting thyristors L4, L6, and L7 remain unlighted (extinguished). Also, as an example, assume that the light-emitting thyristors L9 , L11 , and L12 are caused to light up (emit light) in the lighting control period T(#B) while the light-emitting thyristor L10 remains off. Assume that the image data set "11101001" is printed in the lighting control period T(#A) and the image data set "1011..." is printed in the lighting control period T(#B). the
在图19中,除了消除信号φe之外的信号的波形与图16所示的波形相同。 In FIG. 19 , the waveforms of signals other than the erasing signal φe are the same as those shown in FIG. 16 . the
这里,主要描述了消除信号φe。 Here, the cancellation signal φe is mainly described. the
在点亮控制时段T(#A)中的消除信号φe的电势在时间点c处为“H”,并且在时间点v处从“H”变成“L”。随后,其电势在时间点w处从“L”变成“H”。在点亮控制时段T(#A)的结束时间点y处,其电势保持在“H”。 The potential of the erasing signal φe in the lighting control period T(#A) is "H" at the time point c, and changes from "H" to "L" at the time point v. Subsequently, its potential changes from "L" to "H" at a time point w. At the end time point y of the lighting control period T(#A), its potential is kept at "H". the
换言之,消除信号φe在点亮控制时段T(#A)中的电势一次变为“L”。 In other words, the potential of the erasing signal φe becomes "L" once in the lighting control period T(#A). the
如上所述,接通之后关断的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势从0V变成-3.3V。该变化率由如下时间常数确定,该时间常数由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm定义。如上所述,如果栅极端子Gm的电势变化很慢,由于时段t3被设定很长所以可能有利,但是由于复位时段t5变成更长所以可能不利。 As described above, the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M which is turned off after being turned on changes from 0V to -3.3V. This rate of change is determined by a time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm. As described above, if the potential change of the gate terminal Gm is slow, it may be advantageous because the period t3 is set long, but it may be disadvantageous because the reset period t5 becomes longer. the
在第五示例性实施例中,为了控制复位时段t5,设置了消除信号φe。消除信号φe消除了栅极端子Gm的寄生电容中蓄积的电荷,并且消除了存储器晶闸管M已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的存储信息。 In the fifth exemplary embodiment, in order to control the reset period t5, the erasure signal φe is provided. The erase signal φe erases the charge accumulated in the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm, and erases the stored information of the memory thyristor M whose memory thyristor M has been turned on. the
参考图18,将根据图19所示的时序图描述发光部分63和发光芯片C1(C)的操作。 Referring to FIG. 18 , operations of the
注意,在图18中,仅示出了包括编号均为1-4的转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M、发光晶闸管L等的部分。包括编号均不小于5的晶 闸管的其它部分(图中未示出)是上述部分的重复。在以下描述中。不仅描述编号为1-4的元件,还可以描述具有其它编号的元件。 Note that in FIG. 18 , only the part including the transfer thyristor T, the memory thyristor M, the light emitting thyristor L and the like whose numbers are all 1-4 is shown. Other parts (not shown) including thyristors whose numbers are not less than 5 are repetitions of the above-mentioned parts. in the description below. Not only elements numbered 1-4 are described, but also elements with other numbers may be described. the
在第三和第四示例性实施例中已经描述了从初始状态(时间点a)到时间点s的发光部分63和发光芯片C1(C)的操作,在时间点s处,引起发光晶闸管L8发光的信息被存储在存储器晶闸管M8中,并且由此省略了其具体描述。 The operations of the
当保持信号φb的电势在时间点t从“H”变成“L”时,阈值电压为-2.6V的保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8接通,同时其它保持晶闸管B没有接通。因此,已经接通的保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8的栅极端子Gb1、Gb2、Gb3、Gb5和Gb8变成作为阳极端子电势的“H”(0V)。 When the potential of the holding signal φb changes from "H" to "L" at the time point t, the holding thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5, and B8 whose threshold voltage is -2.6V are turned on, while the other holding thyristors B are not turned on . Accordingly, the gate terminals Gb1 , Gb2 , Gb3 , Gb5 , and Gb8 of the holding thyristors B1 , B2 , B3 , B5 , and B8 that have been turned on become “H” (0 V) as the anode terminal potential. the
每个连接二极管Db的阳极端子连接到栅极端子Gm,阴极端子连接到栅极端子Gb。如上所述,栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8从时间点u开始从0V变成-3.3V。另一方面,栅极端子Gm4、Gm6和Gm7以及各个编号不小于9的保持晶闸管B的栅极端子Gm保持在-3.3V。因此,保持晶闸管B进入反向偏置状态,或者阳极端子和阴极端子具有相同电势的状态。 The anode terminal of each connection diode Db is connected to the gate terminal Gm, and the cathode terminal is connected to the gate terminal Gb. As described above, the gate terminals Gm1 , Gm2 , Gm3 , Gm5 , and Gm8 change from 0 V to −3.3 V from the time point u. On the other hand, the gate terminals Gm4, Gm6, and Gm7 and the gate terminal Gm of the holding thyristor B each numbered not less than 9 are held at -3.3V. Thus, thyristor B is kept in a reverse biased state, or a state in which the anode and cathode terminals have the same potential. the
紧接着时间点t之后,转移晶闸管T8以及存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8保持在导通状态,并且发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8处于点亮(导通)状态。 Immediately after the time point t, the transfer thyristor T8 and the memory thyristors M1 , M2 , M3 , M5 , and M8 are kept in the on state, and the light-emitting thyristors L1 , L2 , L3 , L5 , and L8 are in the lighted (on) state. the
随后,当点亮信号φI1(φI)的电势在时间点u处从“H”变成“Le”(-2.6V<“Le”≤-1.3V)时,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8接通并且点亮(发光)。 Subsequently, when the potential of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) changes from “H” to “Le” (-2.6V<“Le”≤-1.3V) at the time point u, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5 and L8 are switched on and lit (glows). the
另外,在时间点u处,存储器信号φm1(φm)的电势从“S”变成“H”。因此,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M1、M2、M3、M5和M8关断,栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势开始从0V变成-3.3V。该变化率由如下时间常数确定,该时间常数由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm定义。 In addition, at the time point u, the potential of the memory signal φm1 (φm) changes from “S” to “H”. Accordingly, the memory thyristors M1, M2, M3, M5, and M8 that have been turned on are turned off, and the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 start to change from 0V to -3.3V. This rate of change is determined by a time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm. the
此外,当第一转移信号φ1的电势在时间点u处从“H”变成“L”时,转移晶闸管T9接通。 Further, when the potential of the first transfer signal φ1 changes from “H” to “L” at the time point u, the transfer thyristor T9 is turned on. the
在时间点u处,点亮信号φI1(φI)从“H”到“Le”的电势变化、存储器信号φm1(φm)从“S”到“H”的电势变化、以及第一转移信号φ1从“H”到“L”的电势变化之间的关系与第四示例性实施例中描述的关系相同。 At the time point u, the potential change of the lighting signal φI1 (φI) from “H” to “Le”, the potential change of the memory signal φm1 (φm) from “S” to “H”, and the first transition signal φ1 from The relationship between potential changes from "H" to "L" is the same as that described in the fourth exemplary embodiment. the
在时间点v处,消除信号φe的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。因而,消除二极管Sd1、Sd2、Sd3、Sd5和Sd8被正向偏置,并且因此栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势变成这样的值(-2.5V),该值是通过从-3.3V(“L”)中减去消除二极管Sd的正向电势Vs(0.8V)而得到的,如在第三示例性实施例中所述的那样。 At the time point v, the potential of the erasing signal φe changes from "H" (0 V) to "L" (-3.3 V). Thus, the cancellation diodes Sd1, Sd2, Sd3, Sd5, and Sd8 are forward biased, and thus the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 become values (-2.5 V) that are obtained by This is obtained by subtracting the forward potential Vs (0.8 V) of the cancellation diode Sd from -3.3 V ("L"), as described in the third exemplary embodiment. the
换言之,通过把消除信号φe从“H”变成“L”,已经接通的存储器晶闸管M的栅极端子Gm的电势被强制设定在-2.5V,并且加速了栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势变化。 In other words, by changing the cancel signal φe from "H" to "L", the potential of the gate terminal Gm of the memory thyristor M that has been turned on is forcibly set at -2.5V, and the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Potential changes of Gm3, Gm5 and Gm8. the
在时间点v处,保持信号φb的电势从“L”变成“H”。借此变化,使保持晶闸管B1、B2、B3、B5和B8关断。因此,引起点亮的发光晶闸管L的位置(编号)的存储信息从保持晶闸管B中丢失。然而,在时间点u处,发光晶闸管L1、L2、L3、L5和L8已经点亮,因而没有问题。 At the time point v, the potential of the hold signal φb is changed from "L" to "H". By this change, the keeping thyristors B1, B2, B3, B5 and B8 are turned off. Therefore, the stored information of the position (number) of the light-emitting thyristor L that caused the lighting is lost from the holding thyristor B. However, at the time point u, the light-emitting thyristors L1, L2, L3, L5, and L8 are already lit, so there is no problem. the
另外,在时间点v处,第二转移信号φ2的电势从“L”变成“H”。借此变化,转移晶闸管T8关断。 In addition, at the time point v, the potential of the second transfer signal φ2 is changed from "L" to "H". By this change, the transfer thyristor T8 is turned off. the
注意,在时间点v处,消除信号φe从“H”到“L”的电势变化、保持信号φb从“L”到“H”的电势变化、以及第二转移信号φ2从“L”到“H”的电势变化同时执行。 Note that at a time point v, the potential change of the cancel signal φe from “H” to “L”, the potential change of the hold signal φb from “L” to “H”, and the second transfer signal φ2 from “L” to “ The potential change of H" is performed simultaneously. the
可以按照任意顺序执行这些变化。 These changes can be performed in any order. the
具体地说,如果首先执行消除信号φe从“H”到“L”的电势变化,则仅仅加速了栅极端子Gm的电势变化,而没有影响转移晶闸管T和保持晶闸管B的操作。 Specifically, if canceling the potential change of the signal φe from “H” to “L” is performed first, only the potential change of the gate terminal Gm is accelerated without affecting the operations of the transfer thyristor T and the holding thyristor B. the
可选地,如果首先执行保持信号φb从“L”到“H”的电势变化以关断保持晶闸管B,则连接二极管Db的阴极端子(栅极端子Gb)的电势从0V变成-3.3V。同时,作为连接二极管Db阳极端子的栅极 端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势开始从0V变成-3.3V。因此,如果在这些电势变化期间连接二极管Db被正向偏置,则更加速了栅极端子Gm的电势变化(从0V变成-3.3V)。这里,接通保持晶闸管M并不影响转移晶闸管T的操作。 Alternatively, if the potential change of the hold signal φb from “L” to “H” is first performed to turn off the hold thyristor B, the potential of the cathode terminal (gate terminal Gb) of the connection diode Db is changed from 0 V to −3.3 V . At the same time, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8, which are the anode terminals of the connection diode Db, start to change from 0V to -3.3V. Therefore, if the connection diode Db is forward biased during these potential changes, the potential change of the gate terminal Gm (from 0 V to -3.3 V) is accelerated more. Here, turning on the holding thyristor M does not affect the operation of the transfer thyristor T. the
另外可选地是,如果首先执行第二转移信号φ2从“L”到“H”的电势变化以关断转移晶闸管T8,则栅极端子Gt8的电势从0V变成电源电势Vga(-3.3V)。然而,类似于首先执行保持信号φb从“L”到“H”的电势变化的情况,如果在这些电势变化期间连接二极管Dm被正向偏置,则更加速了栅极端子Gt的电势变化(从0V变成-3.3V)。 Also alternatively, if the potential change of the second transfer signal φ2 from “L” to “H” is first performed to turn off the transfer thyristor T8, the potential of the gate terminal Gt8 is changed from 0 V to the power supply potential Vga (−3.3 V ). However, similar to the case where the potential changes of the hold signal φb from “L” to “H” are performed first, if the connection diode Dm is forward biased during these potential changes, the potential changes of the gate terminal Gt are more accelerated ( from 0V to -3.3V). the
如上所述,即使以任意顺序执行这些变化,也不会影响发光芯片C的操作。 As described above, even if these changes are performed in an arbitrary order, the operation of the light-emitting chip C is not affected. the
在时间点w处,消除信号φe的电势从“H”(0V)变成“L”(-3.3V)。因此,消除二极管Sd被正向偏置,或者阳极端子和阴极端子具有相同的电势。根据由栅极端子Gm的寄生电容和电源线电阻Rm定义的时间常数,栅极端子Gm1、Gm2、Gm3、Gm5和Gm8的电势进一步变成-3.3V。 At the time point w, the potential of the erasing signal φe changes from "H" (0 V) to "L" (-3.3 V). Therefore, the cancellation diode Sd is forward biased, or the anode terminal and the cathode terminal have the same potential. According to the time constant defined by the parasitic capacitance of the gate terminal Gm and the power supply line resistance Rm, the potentials of the gate terminals Gm1, Gm2, Gm3, Gm5, and Gm8 further become -3.3V. the
注意,在消除二极管Sd被正向偏置的情况下获得了由消除二极管Sd提取电荷的提取效应。因此,如果栅极端子Gm的电势变成通过从-3.3V(“L”)中减去正向电势Vs而得到的值,则无法再获得通过消除二极管Sd提取电荷的提取效应。 Note that the extraction effect of charge extraction by the cancellation diode Sd is obtained in the case where the cancellation diode Sd is forward biased. Therefore, if the potential of the gate terminal Gm becomes a value obtained by subtracting the forward potential Vs from -3.3V ("L"), the extraction effect of extracting charges by the cancellation diode Sd can no longer be obtained. the
因而,为了有效地加速栅极端子Gm的电势变化,紧接在由于栅极端子Gm的电势而导致消除二极管Sd提取电荷的提取效应丢失之前,消除信号φe的电势可以从“L”变成“H”。 Thus, in order to effectively accelerate the potential change of the gate terminal Gm, the potential of the cancel signal φe may be changed from “L” to “ H". the
在时间点y和随后的时段,其操作与第四示例性实施例中的操作相同,并且由此省略了其具体描述。 At the time point y and subsequent periods, its operation is the same as that in the fourth exemplary embodiment, and thus its detailed description is omitted. the
在第五示例性实施例中,由于消除二极管Sd加速了栅极端子Gm的电势变化,所以与第四示例性实施例中的情况相比,从时间点u到时间点y的复位时段t5可以被设定成很短。因此,可设定发光晶闸管L的较高发光占空比。 In the fifth exemplary embodiment, since the cancellation diode Sd accelerates the potential change of the gate terminal Gm, compared with the case in the fourth exemplary embodiment, the reset period t5 from the time point u to the time point y can be is set to be very short. Therefore, a higher light-emitting duty ratio of the light-emitting thyristor L can be set. the
注意,在第一到第五示例性实施例中,尽管图6中所示的每个 组中所包括的发光晶闸管L的数量被设定成8,但是该数量可以任意设定。此时,只需要改变信号(第一转移信号φ1、第二转移信号φ2、存储器信号φm、保持信号φb、消除信号φe和点亮信号φI)的定时,而无需改变发光芯片C的结构。 Note that, in the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, although the number of light-emitting thyristors L included in each group shown in FIG. 6 is set to 8, the number may be set arbitrarily. At this time, only the timing of the signals (first transfer signal φ1, second transfer signal φ2, memory signal φm, hold signal φb, erase signal φe, and lighting signal φI) needs to be changed without changing the structure of the light-emitting chip C. the
另外,在第一到第五示例性实施例中,基于以下假定进行了描述:每个发光芯片C中所包括的发光晶闸管L的数量被设定成128。然而,这个数量也是可以任意设定的。另外,假定一个自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED)安装在一个发光芯片C上。然而,可以在个发光芯片C上面安装多个SLED。 In addition, in the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, description has been made on the assumption that the number of light-emitting thyristors L included in each light-emitting chip C is set to 128. However, this number can also be set arbitrarily. In addition, it is assumed that a self-scanning light emitting element array (SLED) is mounted on one light emitting chip C. As shown in FIG. However, a plurality of SLEDs may be mounted on each light emitting chip C. Referring to FIG. the
另外,基于以下假定进行了描述:发光晶闸管L的数量与转移晶闸管T、存储器晶闸管M和保持晶闸管B各自的数量相同。然而,转移晶闸管T的数量大于发光晶闸管L的数量也是可以接受的。这是通过在没有写入图像数据集时驱动具有第一转移信号φ1和第二转移信号φ部分的器件实现的。 In addition, the description has been made on the assumption that the number of light-emitting thyristors L is the same as the respective numbers of transfer thyristors T, memory thyristors M, and holding thyristors B. FIG. However, it is also acceptable that the number of transfer thyristors T is greater than the number of light emitting thyristors L. This is achieved by driving the device with portions of the first transfer signal φ1 and the second transfer signal φ when the image data set is not being written. the
在第一到第五示例性实施例中,假定存储器信号φm被单独提供到发光芯片C,并且每个点亮信号φI被共同提供到对应的两个发光芯片C。然而,点亮信号φI可以被单独提供到发光芯片C,或者每个点亮信号φI可以被共同提供到三个或更多个发光芯片C。 In the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, it is assumed that the memory signal φm is individually supplied to the light-emitting chips C, and each lighting signal φI is supplied to the corresponding two light-emitting chips C in common. However, the lighting signal φI may be supplied to the light-emitting chips C individually, or each lighting signal φI may be supplied to three or more light-emitting chips C in common. the
可选地,通过串联连接多个发光芯片C以形成像个自扫描发光元件阵列(SLED)芯片的多个发光芯片C,存储器信号φm和点亮信号φI可以被共同提供到彼此串联连接的多个发光芯片C。 Alternatively, by connecting a plurality of light-emitting chips C in series to form a plurality of light-emitting chips C like a self-scanning light-emitting element array (SLED) chip, the memory signal φm and the lighting signal φI can be commonly supplied to the multiple light-emitting chips C connected in series to each other. A light-emitting chip C. the
在第一到第五示例性实施例中,描述了共阳极的情况,其中基板被设置为晶闸管的阳极端子。通过改变电路的极性,可以使用共阴极晶闸管,其中基板被设置为阴极端子。 In the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the case of a common anode in which the substrate is provided as the anode terminal of the thyristor was described. By changing the polarity of the circuit, common cathode thyristors can be used where the substrate is provided as the cathode terminal. the
另外,在第一到第五示例性实施例中,发光芯片C由基于GaAs的半导体形成,例如,GaAS、GaAlAs等,但是发光芯片C的材料并不限于此。例如,发光芯片C可以由很难通过离子注入变成p型半导体或n型半导体的其它化合物半导体形成,诸如GaP。 In addition, in the first to fifth exemplary embodiments, the light emitting chip C is formed of a GaAs-based semiconductor such as GaAs, GaAlAs, or the like, but the material of the light emitting chip C is not limited thereto. For example, the light emitting chip C may be formed of other compound semiconductors that are difficult to become p-type semiconductors or n-type semiconductors by ion implantation, such as GaP. the
注意,在本发明中发光装置的使用并不限于在电子照相图像形成单元中使用的曝光装置。除了电子照相式记录、显示、照明、光学通信等之外,本发明中的发光装置还可以用于光学写入。 Note that the use of the light emitting device in the present invention is not limited to the exposure device used in the electrophotographic image forming unit. In addition to electrophotographic recording, display, illumination, optical communication, etc., the light emitting device in the present invention can also be used for optical writing. the
出于解释和说明的目的提供了本发明的示例性实施例的前述说明。其本意并不是穷举或将本发明限制为所公开的确切形式。显然,对于本技术领域的技术人员可以进行许多修改和变型。选择和说明该示例性实施例是为了更好地解释本发明的原理及其实际应用,因此使得本技术领域的其他技术人员能够理解本发明所适用的各种实施例并预见到适合于特定应用的各种修改。目的在于通过所附权利要求及其等同内容限定本发明的范围。 The foregoing description of the exemplary embodiments of the present invention has been presented for purposes of illustration and description. It is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the invention to the precise forms disclosed. Obviously, many modifications and variations will occur to those skilled in the art. The exemplary embodiment was chosen and described in order to best explain the principles of the invention and its practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to understand various embodiments of the invention to which it is applicable and to foresee suitable applications for particular applications. various modifications. It is intended that the scope of the invention be defined by the appended claims and their equivalents. the
Claims (12)
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2009-204982 | 2009-09-04 | ||
| JP2009204982A JP5333075B2 (en) | 2009-09-04 | 2009-09-04 | Light-emitting device, self-scanning light-emitting element array driving method, print head, and image forming apparatus |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| CN102014232A true CN102014232A (en) | 2011-04-13 |
| CN102014232B CN102014232B (en) | 2014-01-22 |
Family
ID=43647436
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| CN201010112543.4A Active CN102014232B (en) | 2009-09-04 | 2010-02-21 | Light-emitting device, print head and image forming device |
Country Status (3)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (1) | US8305415B2 (en) |
| JP (1) | JP5333075B2 (en) |
| CN (1) | CN102014232B (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN108780827A (en) * | 2016-06-30 | 2018-11-09 | 富士施乐株式会社 | Luminous component, print head, image forming apparatus and semiconductor layer multilayer board |
Families Citing this family (11)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US8098271B2 (en) * | 2008-08-22 | 2012-01-17 | Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. | Exposure device, light-emitting device, image forming apparatus and failure diagnosing method |
| JP4614017B1 (en) * | 2009-07-22 | 2011-01-19 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Light emitting device, print head, and image forming apparatus |
| JP4988893B2 (en) * | 2010-03-26 | 2012-08-01 | 株式会社沖データ | Drive circuit, drive device, and image forming apparatus |
| JP5830759B2 (en) * | 2010-06-25 | 2015-12-09 | ナルテック株式会社 | Apparatus for supplying a signal for generating a multi-tone image |
| JP5724520B2 (en) * | 2011-03-28 | 2015-05-27 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Light emitting chip, print head, and image forming apparatus |
| KR102139681B1 (en) | 2014-01-29 | 2020-07-30 | 휴렛-팩커드 디벨롭먼트 컴퍼니, 엘.피. | Light-emitting element array module and method for controlling Light-emitting element array chips |
| CN105206228B (en) * | 2015-10-16 | 2018-01-02 | 矽恩微电子(厦门)有限公司 | The LED scanning arrays driving chip and adjusting method that brightness linear change is voluntarily adjusted |
| JP7087690B2 (en) * | 2018-06-04 | 2022-06-21 | 富士フイルムビジネスイノベーション株式会社 | Light emitting device, light measuring device and image forming device |
| JP7605143B2 (en) * | 2022-02-02 | 2024-12-24 | 富士フイルムビジネスイノベーション株式会社 | Light source device, light emitting device and measuring device |
| JP7635732B2 (en) * | 2022-02-02 | 2025-02-26 | 富士フイルムビジネスイノベーション株式会社 | Light source device and measuring device |
| JP7582221B2 (en) * | 2022-02-02 | 2024-11-13 | 富士フイルムビジネスイノベーション株式会社 | Light source device, light emitting device and measuring device |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2001219596A (en) * | 2000-02-14 | 2001-08-14 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Self-scanning type light-emitting element array |
| US20050224810A1 (en) * | 2002-02-25 | 2005-10-13 | Seiji Ohno | Light-emitting device having pnpn structure and light-emitting device array |
| CN1880094A (en) * | 2000-09-05 | 2006-12-20 | 日本板硝子株式会社 | Optical writing head and bar-shaped lens and light-emitting element array distribution method |
| JP2007160930A (en) * | 2005-11-17 | 2007-06-28 | Fuji Xerox Co Ltd | Printing head |
Family Cites Families (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS5643868A (en) * | 1979-09-17 | 1981-04-22 | Ricoh Co Ltd | Heat-sensitive recording method |
| JP2577089B2 (en) * | 1988-11-10 | 1997-01-29 | 日本板硝子株式会社 | Light emitting device and driving method thereof |
| JP4196586B2 (en) * | 2002-04-30 | 2008-12-17 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Light emitting element array chip, optical writing head, and optical writing head driving method |
| JP4284983B2 (en) * | 2002-12-03 | 2009-06-24 | 富士ゼロックス株式会社 | Self-scanning light emitting element array chip and optical writing head |
| JP4123183B2 (en) * | 2004-04-20 | 2008-07-23 | ソニー株式会社 | Constant current drive device, backlight light source device, and color liquid crystal display device |
-
2009
- 2009-09-04 JP JP2009204982A patent/JP5333075B2/en active Active
-
2010
- 2010-01-26 US US12/693,507 patent/US8305415B2/en active Active
- 2010-02-21 CN CN201010112543.4A patent/CN102014232B/en active Active
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP2001219596A (en) * | 2000-02-14 | 2001-08-14 | Nippon Sheet Glass Co Ltd | Self-scanning type light-emitting element array |
| CN1880094A (en) * | 2000-09-05 | 2006-12-20 | 日本板硝子株式会社 | Optical writing head and bar-shaped lens and light-emitting element array distribution method |
| US20050224810A1 (en) * | 2002-02-25 | 2005-10-13 | Seiji Ohno | Light-emitting device having pnpn structure and light-emitting device array |
| JP2007160930A (en) * | 2005-11-17 | 2007-06-28 | Fuji Xerox Co Ltd | Printing head |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| CN108780827A (en) * | 2016-06-30 | 2018-11-09 | 富士施乐株式会社 | Luminous component, print head, image forming apparatus and semiconductor layer multilayer board |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JP2011051319A (en) | 2011-03-17 |
| CN102014232B (en) | 2014-01-22 |
| US8305415B2 (en) | 2012-11-06 |
| US20110058009A1 (en) | 2011-03-10 |
| JP5333075B2 (en) | 2013-11-06 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| CN102014232B (en) | Light-emitting device, print head and image forming device | |
| CN104191826B (en) | Light-emitting device and luminescence chip | |
| CN101734021B (en) | Light-emitting element head, image forming apparatus and signal supply method | |
| EP2184171B1 (en) | Light-emitting element chip | |
| CN101746153B (en) | Light-emitting element array drive device, print head, image forming apparatus and signal supplying method | |
| CN102019766B (en) | Light-emitting device, print head and image forming apparatus | |
| CN102244071B (en) | Light-emitting device and array element, printhead, imaging device and light-emitting control method | |
| KR101301630B1 (en) | Light emitting device, print head and image forming device | |
| JP5760586B2 (en) | Light emitting device, print head, and image forming apparatus | |
| JP7119834B2 (en) | Light emitting device, light source device, print head and image forming device | |
| JP4803238B2 (en) | Light emitting element head and image forming apparatus | |
| CN102709305B (en) | Luminescence chip, printhead and image forming apparatus | |
| CN102207262B (en) | Light-emitting device, driving method of light-emitting device, print head and image forming apparatus | |
| JP2011066163A (en) | Light-emitting chip, print head and image forming apparatus | |
| JP2015074180A (en) | Light-emitting component, print head, and image formation device | |
| JP5664096B2 (en) | Light emitting device, driving method of light emitting device, light emitting chip, print head, and image forming apparatus | |
| KR101424659B1 (en) | Light-emitting element array drive device, print head, image forming apparatus, and signal supplying method | |
| JP2011194827A (en) | Exposure device, method of driving exposure device, print head, and image forming device | |
| JP5316589B2 (en) | Light emitting device, print head, and image forming apparatus | |
| JP2012020498A (en) | Light-emitting device, print head, and image forming apparatus | |
| JP2012056209A (en) | Light emitting device, method for driving the same, print head, and image forming apparatus |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| C06 | Publication | ||
| PB01 | Publication | ||
| C10 | Entry into substantive examination | ||
| SE01 | Entry into force of request for substantive examination | ||
| C14 | Grant of patent or utility model | ||
| GR01 | Patent grant | ||
| CP01 | Change in the name or title of a patent holder | ||
| CP01 | Change in the name or title of a patent holder |
Address after: Tokyo Patentee after: Fuji film business innovation Co.,Ltd. Address before: Tokyo Patentee before: Fuji Xerox Co.,Ltd. |